AC AC/DC V A - ProElektro DISTRIBUTION

www.elkoep.com
TECHNICAL CATALOGUE
Presentation of ELKO EP Company
ELKO EP, which is based in Holešov, has been with you on the electrical market for the past 20 years, covering a wide range of domestic equipments in the field of electrical installations. In the last few years there has been dynamic development of smart wiring, in which our company has been seven years developing and launching iNELS smart home system solutions. In modular devices, as well as in smart wiring, we have become market leaders. We‘re developing products that bring comfort to customers and safety for the environment.
The Parent ELKO EP company has gradually grown in 7 branches - Slovakia, Hungary, Poland,
Russia, Ukraine, Romania and most recently Germany. At the same time we export to 60 countries around the world, and our products can be found under the world famous brand names (Schneider Electric, Eaton, HAGER, Siemens, MORS SMITT).
Our work is based on the development and modern technology. In practice, we appreciate you as our customers, because you‘re receiving good products and smart solutions, which meet your requirements. Our development facilities and precise production and distribution, all this gives you the opportunity to use solutions which are both innovative and practical. There are our modern manufacturing facilities to produce all our products. It was extended over the newest and fastest SMD line, which means for you guaranteed quality and flexibility of supply.
We have and supervise 80% share of the Czech market and the fourth position in Europe.
Current-year sales growth: 20%
Number of employees in Holešov: 170
Number of employees of ELKO EP Holding: 236
Awards and Recognition:
In 2011, the experts awarded the top products developed in ELKO EP: RF Touch - wireless touch control unit won a Golden Amper, Moravian Electrical and Electronic
Association Award, Innovation Award of the year and PwC Special Award for Innovation. Also iNELS Multimedia - Multimedia control through television, won an award
- honorable mention Grand Prix.
Providing the possibility for students in technical fields to do their thesis. In 2012, the company ELKO EP became THE Number ONE company in Zlín Region and in the national finals, we won second place.
Our range of products is divided into three product lines - relay (classical modular devices), RF Control (wireless), iNELS BUS system (Bus System). Each product line has its own technical catalogue, where you can find complete information on individual products.
2
Product Lines
RELAYS - Modular electronic devices www.elkoep.com
A wide range of electronic modular devices, which bring new possibilities to home and office control, monitoring and security, as well as to industrial process control: time relays, installation contactors, staircase automatic switches, time switches clocks, dimmers, thermostats, power supplies units, control and signalling devices,
GSM gates, etc.
iNELS - Intelligent electro-installation System www.inels.com
iNELS will transform your house into a timeless intelligent household. It will take charge of heating and air-conditioning regulation, lighting control and home appliance switching, while also providing perfect security for your home. Enjoy controlling your entire house via a TV screen thanks to iNELS Multimedia (iMM) or use the elegant iNELS Touch Panel (iTP).
iNELS RF Control - Wireless control www.elkoep.com
A unique wireless control system providing you perfect control over your home! The RF Control system enables you to control functions such as heating, lighting, electrical appliances and window shutters, all with a single touch. No wall cutting, fast and easy installation, exclusive design of wireless wall switch buttons and other components.
LOGUS 90 – Home switches and sockets www.logus90.com
We offer you exclusive switches, sockets and accessories in a standard plastic or metallic design. However, there are also charming luxury frames from purely natural materials such as genuine wood, metal, granite or hardened glass. Be especial!
iNELS system advantages
Advantages to classical electrical installation:
Comfort
- dimming function (gradual dim-up/dim-down, soft start, light scenes)
- control via touch-screen (built-in a wall) = complete information
- control via any remote controller (e.g. of your TV or stereo)
- control by voice (Sophy unit, listens to your voice commands)
- temperature regulation according to pre-set programs – in each
room individually
- possibility to control by mobile phone, computer and Internet
Automatization
- function is executed automatically on the basis of set value (time, temperature,
light intensity, movement of people, wind strength...)
- it is possible to execute several functions on the basis of one command or
event (e.g. when it is dark - INELS rolls shutters down, switches lights on,
increases room temperature and switches TV on, and many others ...)
- arrival/departure functions: after a code is entered (or a card read) to a
keyboard, system automatically sets electrical appliances according to the
identifi ed user.
Information
- system informs you about selected event/events by SMS text message
- anywhere you are and if you have an access to Internet, you can connect
to your house and supervise or change its state
- integrated security system can be connected to a security agency
Security
- alarm with extended functions is a part of the system
- system is equipped by a keyboard which can be controlled by a code
or by an access card
- all settings and accesses are subjects of passwords in several levels
- protection of a house in case of bad weather (shutters in strong winds or
storm), unexpected events (irregularities in power supply, overload), natural
disasters (sensor for flooding, smoke sensor)
- bio-installation: deconnection of unused electric circuit (e.g. socket
outlets in bedroom while sleeping)
- setting ideal conditions for your children’s sleep (gradual dimming off ,
pleasant temperature, motion monitoring = baby-sitting)
- touchable parts of sensors are supplied by a safe voltage 24V DC
Savings
- regulation of heating / cooling
- time or time-limited switching
- light regulation (possible energy savings up to 10% )
- dependant switching (e.g. when it is dark, for desired temperature etc...)
- blocking of selected appliances in case of high meter readings
- elimination of unwillingly switched appliances (e.g. when there is no
motion – light switches off )
Design
- modern design of the switches and sockets, thermostat, voice activity
detectors – optional designes of Elegant or LOGUS
90
- variety to combine diff erent colours also in multiframe versions
- touch panel screen – unique solution of elegant wireless home
automation
Time for installation
- considerably lower thanks to bus installation (only 2 control wires)
- units are installed and later programmed
Flexibility of changes and extensions
- in future it is possible to add or change units easily
- functions can be changed by PC, also remotely through Internet
Available features for disabled people
- voice and remote control
- sound messages for blind (unit Sophy speaks pre-recorded messages)
- several actions can be done by one command
- control by computer from one spot
Choose the right one!
PRICE
OF INSTALLATION
Control using the TV
Tablet / SmartPhone
PC / Laptop
Music playback
Video cameras
Weather station
Door communicator
Controlling home appliances
Touch panel
Control via GSM telephone
Detectors
Group controller
Heating regulation
Controlling blinds
Dimming lights
Controlling appliances
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Classic electro -installation
Electricity is a necessary companion to our everyday life and follows us almost wherever we go. Not only does it provide us with light or a means of cooking, but it also gets us around from point A to point B.
Everybody knows where to find the home electric control panel and what to do when the power goes out.
We make all the devices that go into such control panels and switchboards, and have been selling them for almost 20 years.
Our assortment includes all modular electronic devices (time relays, installation contactors, staircase switches, timers, dimmers, thermostats, power sources, control and signaling devices).
Thanks to experience, we stand on solid foundations, and we are responsibly developing wide-ranging additions in the form of higher levels of electrical installations - either wireless or intelligent (bus-based).
Energy savings:
Con trolling app lia nces
Dimming lights
Con trolling blinds
Heating reg ulatio n
Group controller
Detectors Control via GSM telephone
Touch panel
Controlling household appliances
Door communicator
Weather station
Video cameras
(outdoor/indoor)
Audio Zone
(music playback)
PC/Laptop Tablet
SmartPhone
Video Zone
(controlling via TV)
Choose the right one!
PRICE
OF INSTALLATION
Control using the TV
Tablet
PC / Laptop
Music playback
Video cameras
Weather station
Door communicator
Controlling home appliances
Touch panel
Control via Smartphone
Detectors
Wireless switch
Heating regulation
Controlling blinds
Dimming lights
Controlling appliances
-
-
-
-
-
-
Wireless electrical installations
Most of you have already built a house or furnished an apartment. If you want to bring life into your home, we have an elegant wireless solution. As the name implies, the wireless communication is working with a range of up to 200 m (it depends on the internal structure of the house/apartment, and the used building materials.
The central brain is in this case the touch RF Touch unit, which can be placed anywhere within the range. It‘s possible not only to program entire system from this unit, but also to control it. Brightly replaces several thermostats and controllers. Within the system, you have an unlimited opportunity to add any drivers and placing them at the suitable places.
Energy savings:
Con trolli appliances
Dim ming lights
Con trolli blinds
Heatin g regulation
Wir ss switch
Det ors C t l i
Smartphone
Tou ch panel
Controlling household a ppl iances
Door communicator
Weather station
Video cameras
(outdoor/indoor)
Audio Zone
(music playback)
PC /Laptop Tablet Video Zone
(controlling via TV)
PRICE
OF INSTALLATIONONE
Control using the TV
Tablet
PC / Laptop
Music playback
Video cameras
Weather station
Door communicator
Controlling home appliances
Touch panel
Control via smartphone
Detectors
Group controller
Heating regulation
Controlling blinds
Dimming lights
Controlling appliances
Bus electrical installations
Are you building a new home? Then you should consider a bus-based solution. A bus in this sense is a data conductor that is distributed in the walls across the entire home. As opposed to a wireless solution, its advantage is range, because up to 6 x 550 m buses can be distributed in a single building.
Connection to a computer expands the scope of its available functions. This system may be expanded to include multimedia extensions and can connect third party devices (household appliances, A/C, etc.). Control and monitoring the system can be performed via PC, the
Internet, telephone, tablet, etc.
The system offers a wider range of functions that can be applied. A computer is used to set the parameters.
Energy savings:
Con tro lli ng appliances
Con tro lli ng blinds
Gro up controller
C tro l v ia
Smartphone
Con tro lli ng hou se hold applian ces
Doo r r commun icator
Wea the r statio n
Vid eo cam era s
(outdoor/indoor)
Aud io Zon e
(music playback)
PC / Lap top Tab let Vid eo Zon e
(controlling via TV)
iNELS smart home solutions
10 reasons to choose bus system
5)
6)
7)
8)
1)
2)
3)
4)
9)
10)
Ideal solution for new buildings
Two-wire bus
Bus once stretched you can always expand
Security system, combined with detectors
Remote control (PC, mobile phone applications)
Imitation of presence
Regulation depending on the weather
Ecology and energy saving
Modern trends in controling
Media under control (can also be controlled via TV)
10 reasons to choose wireless system
5)
6)
7)
8)
1)
2)
3)
4)
9)
10)
Do you know that heating regulations save up to 30% from the energy costs
Without any reconstruction work
The fast duration for electrical installations‘s implementation
Convenient and affordable prices for everyone
The possibility of upgrading your system - gradually upgrade your installations
Battery - powered transmitters - no electrical injury
The variability of the features that you can change
The design, which inspires you
Professional assembly and service of our partners
We are the Czech company, which top priority is customer‘s satisfaction
House switches and sockets
B A SE
Plastic
A Q UARELLA
Metallic design
A N IMATO
Plastic
C R YSTAL
Crystal
M E TALLO
Metal
A R BORE
Wood
P E TRA
Stone
BR - White
MF - Ivory
GE - Ice DG - Green/Ice CG - Crystal/Ice TP - Titanium/Pearl FP - Beech Wood/Pearl GG - Granite/Ice
PE - Pearl ZG - Blue/Ice CP - CRYSTAL/Pearl IA - Inox/Aluminium JP - Cherry Tree/Pearl GP - Granite/Pearl
AL - Aluminium JG - Orange/Ice CA - Crystal/Aluminium OP - Gold/Pearl MS - Mahogany/Grey GA - Granite/Aluminium
IS - Grey VG - Red/Ice CS - Crystal/Grey QS - Nickel/Grey NA - Walnut Tree/Aluminium GS - Granite/Grey
Design ranges
BASE
– Simplicity is the sign of beauty. Precise and convenient shapes, distinctive colours embodied in switches.
AQUARELLA
– Spacetime without limits. Metallic design will draw you into the world of exclusive design.
Animato
– Wide range of colors, modern design and nice price.
CRYSTAL
– Endless elegance of glass. Switches underlining the dynamics of your interior.
METALLO
– Be exceptional! Nobility of metal will inspire you with unforgettable moments.
ARBORE
– The Nature at your fingertips. Warm tones of wood create an atmosphere of absolute bliss.
PETRA
– Feel free to experiment. Stone is a symbol of stability, strength and power. Enjoy the switches you can lean on.
www.logus90.com
Catalogue content
Modular electronic devices
Time relays
Time relays review
Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
Multifunction time relays
CRM-61
CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE - with external potentiometer
15
16–17
18
PLUG-IN - PRM-91H/11, PRM-91H/8, PRM-92H, PRM-2H 19
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B 20–21
Digital time switch SHT 22
8–9
10
11
12
13
14
Timer with an astronomical program SHT-4
Time switch SHT-6 with DCF managing
DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77
23
24
25
Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B 26–27
Staircase switch CRM-4 28
Staircase switch CRM-42 with signalling before switching off, CRM-42F 29
Power and auxiliary relays
Power and auxiliary relays review 31
Modular VS116K, VS308K, VS316/24,VS316/230, VS116U, VS308U 32–33
Plug-in
782L,750L
Dimmers
Overview of dimmers
Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2
Controlled dimmer
DIM-5
34–35
36
37
DIM-14
DIM-6
DIM-6-3M-P
DIM-15, SMR-M
SMR-S, SMR-U
LIC-1
Power supplies
Power supplies review
Line DR
Line PS
Power supplies ZSR-30, ZNP-10
Bell transformer ZTR
Other modular devices
Twilight switch SOU-1
Twilight switch with digital time switch SOU-2 innovation!
Twilight and light switch SOU-3
Memory relay MR-41, MR-42
Controlling and signalling units USS
Monitoring relays
Monitoring relays review
HRN-41/42
59– 60
61
HRN-3x, HRN-6x 62–63
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N 64
Relay for monitoring over/undervoltage and phase failure HRN-57, HRN-57N 65
Relay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase sequence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N 66
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56 (120, 208, 240, 400, 480, 575) 67
Relay monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1
68–69
70
46– 47
48–49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
38
39
40
41
42–43
44
45
Modular electronic devices
Monitoring relays
Monitoring current relays
PRI-32
PRI-51
PRI-52
PRI-53
PRI-41, PRI-42
Current transformer SR for monitoring current relays PRI (accessories) 76
Level monitoring level
Level monitoring relays HRH-1 77
Level monitoring relays HRH-5
Level monitoring relays HRH-4
Level monitoring relays HRH-6
78–79
80–81
82
71
72
73
74
75
Level sensors to level switches SHR-1M, SHR-1N, SHR-2, SHR-3 (accessories) 83
Relay monitoring
COS-1
HRF-10
Thermostats
84
85
Thermostats review
Analog and digital thermostats
86–87
Modular thermostat TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)
Modular thermostat TER-3 (E, F)
Modular 2-stage thermostat TER-4
88
89
90
Modular thermostat for controlling temperature of motor winding TER-7 91
Modular multifunction digital thermostat TER-9 92–93
Thermo - ATR, ATF, ATC 94
Thermo - DTR, DTF, DTC
Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1
Single-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-2, TEV-3
Two-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-1
Outdoor thermostat TEV-4
Humidistat RHT-1
Outdoor humidistat RHV-1
Accessories
Thermal sensors to thermostats TC, TZ, PT-100
Installation contactors
Installation contactors review
Installation contactors and installation contactors with manual control
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463
VSM220, VSM425
Loadability of installation contactors
EAN codes
Technical information
Main instructions (for correct use of products)
Product loadability
Electromagnetic compatibility of products
EMC chart
Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads
Products packing
Dimensions
Examples of usage
Support of project design
Production technology
104–105
106
107
108
109
110
111–112
113
114
115
116
117–121
122–129
133
134–135
Time relays
Single-function
CRM-81J
3 functions and 6 time ranges, multivoltage or
230V supply, output 16A changeover/SPDT.
Multifunction
Analog
CRM-83J
as CRM-81J but with 3x8A changeover output/SPDT.
CRM-82TO
“true OFF” relay - delay off without supply, for back-up circuits.
SJR-2
two-state delay unit
(2x delay on), gradual switching of high loads.
CRM-2T
delay start-up of motors star/delta.
CRM-2H
asymmetric cycler, independent time setting
ON/OFF.
CRM-2HE
as CRM-2H , but time setting by external potentiometers (for frequent setting).
Digital
CRM-91H
10 functions, 10 time ranges,
1x output 16A changeover/
SPDT, multivoltage or 230V supply.
CRM-93H
as CRM-91 but output
3x8A chageover/SPDT.
CRM-9S
as CRM-91 but contactless output (triac 0.7A).
CRM-61
cost eff ective version of
CRM-91H, 6 functions,
6 time ranges. Output 8A changeover/SPDT, supply
AC 24-240 V, DC 24V .
CRM-91HE
as CRM-91H but with time setting by external potentiometer
(for frequent setting).
Potentiometer
potentiometer - external control unit for CRM-91HE and CRM-2HE, mounting into a switchboard, max connection length 10 m.
Staircase switch
PLUG-IN
PDR-2A
4 digit display, 16 functions,
2 independent times 0.01s-100 hrs
2 outputs 16A changeover/SPDT
START/STOP inputs.
PDR-2B
as PDR-2A but 10 functions for each output and time - meaning two relays in one device.
SHT-1, SHT-1/2
SHT1: time switch with daily, weekly programming. 1-channel, output 16 A changeover/SPDT.
SHT1/2: as SHT-1, but 2-channel.
SHT-3, SHT-3/2
as SHT-1 but with daily, weekly, monthly, and annual programming up to 2095.
SHT3/2: as SHT-3, but 2-channel.
SHT-4
Timer with an astronomical program to control the lighting without using a light sensor.
2-channel.
SHT-6
Time switch with DCF managing.
Daily, weekly and annual program, output 16 A.
1-channel.
PRM-91H/11
as CRM-91H but into 11-pin socket, multivoltage supply, output contact 16 A.
PRM-91H/8
as PRM-91H/11 but with
8-pin socket, output contact 16A.
PRM-92H
as PRM-91H but with 2x changeover/SPDT 8A contacts, into 11-pin socket.
PRM-2H
as CRM-2H but with 11-pin socket,
2x changeover, 8A contact.
socket to DIN rail
ES-11 (11 pin)
ES-8 (8 pin).
MINI
SMR-K
super multifunction relay for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral).
Input: can be connected in parallel with LED energy saving light bulb or fl uorescent lamp.
SMR-T
super multifunction relay for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire connection
(without neutral).
SMR-H
as SMR-T but 4 wire connection, output - triac 0-200 VA,
9 functions including function of memory relay.
SMR-B
as SMR-H but output relay contact 16 A
(possibility to switch also fl uorescent lights).
CRM-4
basic version , time
0.5-10 min output contact 16 A , anti-blocking function.
CRM-42
programmable staircase switch with warning before switching off , time setting by number of button pressings.
CRM-42F
programmable staircase switch without warning before switching off , time setting by number of button pressings.
DIM-2
with dimming, setting: dim-up/shining/dim-down brightness only for el. bulbs output up to 500VA.
8
Chart 1. Version - DIN rail mounting
Type
Asymmetric cycler starting with delay
Asymmetric cycler starting with impulse
Delay ON star / delta
Switching in real time
Impuls relay in delay ON
0.1 - 1 s
1 - 10 s
0.1 - 1 min
1 - 10 min
0.1 - 1 hrs
1 - 10 hrs
0.1 - 1 day
1 - 10 days
3 - 30 days
10 - 100 days
30 s - 10 min
99 h 59 min 59 s
Day
Week
Month
Year
230 V AC
12 - 240 V AC/DC
12 - 240 V AC
1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A
1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A
2x changeover 8 A
2x changeover 16 A
3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A
Static output (triac)
1x NO 16 A
1-MODULE
2-MODULE
3-MODULE
PLUG-IN
Under the switch
Rotary switch
Button
Sliding switch
External potentiometer
Delay OFF after switch off the Input supply
Delay ON
Delay OFF
Symmetrical cycler starting with delay
Delay OFF after impulse OFF
Symmetrical cycler starting with impulse
Staircase switch
Impulse shift
Memory (impulse) relay
Impulse generator
Delay ON at switch on controlling contact
See chart 2 Version - mounting into installation box (KU68)
Chart 2. Version - mounting into installation box (KU68)
Type
0.1 - 1 s
1 - 10 s
0.1 - 1 min
1 - 10 min
0.1 - 1 h
1 - 10 h
0.1 - 1 day
1 - 10 days
A -delay off on entering edge
B - delay off on downward edge
C - delay off on downward edge
D - cycler - fl asher by impuls
E - puls shift
F - delay on
G - pulse relay
H - impulse relay with delay
I - cycler starting with gap j - delay on after switched off
AC 230 V
1x triac
1x NO AgSnO
2
9
Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Single-function and single-time relay with possibility of fi ne time setting by a potentiometer
(within the frames of a particular time range)
Suitable for applications where function and time requirements are known
Time switch, possible to be used for pump decay time after switching heating off , switching of fans
Choice of 3 functions:
1) ZR - Delay ON
2) ZN -Delay OFF
3) BL - Repeat Cycle
Functions can be controlled by supply voltage or time scale control input.:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 6 s - 60 s / 1 min - 10 min / 6 min - 60 min / 1 h - 10 hrs)
Universal voltage range AC/DC 12 - 240 V
Output contact: CRM-81J: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A
CRM-83J: 3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A
Red LED output indicator
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
CRM-81J by type
CRM-83J by type
Technical parameters
Functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Consumption of input:
Load between S-A2:
Control terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Power of control input:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Operating position:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size(mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
CRM-81J
CRM-83J
ZR - delay ON / ZN - delay OFF/ BL- cycler 1:1
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 10 h (in 6 alternate) potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01% / 0 C, at =20 0 C
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
10 A / <3 s red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V)
Yes (UNI), Yes (AC 230 V)
A1-S
Yes
UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO
230 V - max.10 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230 AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals any
III.
2 solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
(UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g (UNI) - 86 g, (230) - 82 g
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Symbol
CRM-81J
A1 16 18
Connection
S A2
A1 16 18 26 28 36 38
15 S A2 15 25 35
+
A1 S A2
-
35 36 38
25 26 28
15 16 18
A1 S A2
-
15 16 18
Un
+
A1
S A2 load
16 18
15
Example of an order
CRM-81J/230, ZR10s
1x changeover contact, voltage AC 230 V, function: delay ON, time 1 - 10 s
CRM-83J/UNI, BL1h
3x changeover contact, voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V, function: cycler begin with impulse, time 6 - 60 min
Functions
ZR - Delay ON ZN - Delay OFF
BL - Cycler 1:1
Note: the function ZR and ZN is controlled by supply voltage and control input ie. when it comes to failure and refreshing the supply voltage, the relay automatically makes one cycle.
Time range min max
1 s 10 s 1 min 10 min 1 hr 10 hrs
0.1 s 1 s 6 s 1 min 6 min 1 hr
1 s 10 s 60 s 10 min 60 min 10 hrs
Description
Supply terminals
A1 S A2
Supply indication
Time setting
Control input “S”
Output indication
15 16 18 Output contact
10
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
EAN code
CRM-82TO /UNI: 8595188137614
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Operating position:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
a - Delay OFF (S break) the power supply is switched off (min. time is 0.5 s)
U e - Off Delay (S break)
U t
CRM-82TO
a - On Delay (Power On)/ e - Off Delay (S Break)
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 10 min potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
2x changeover/SPDT (AgNi/ Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
10 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals any
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 ( AWG 12 ) with sleeve max. 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 ( AWG 12 )
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
93 g (3.3 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
!
„True OFF“ relay - relay timing without supply voltage
!
Sample of use: back-up source for Delay OFF in case of voltage failure (e.g. emergency lighting, emergency respirator, or protection of el. controlled doors - in case of fi re)
!
2 time functions adjustable by rotary switch: a - Delayed return after disconnecting of supply e - Delayed start
!
Time range (adjustable by rotary switch and fi ne setting by potentiometer): 0.1 s - 10 min
!
Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A
!
Output status indicated by red LED (only in case of supply voltage connection)
!
Clamp terminals
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Connection
A1
A2
Description
Supply indication
16 18 26 28
15 25
A1 A2
16 26
CRM-82TO
FUNC
e a
18 28
Un
A1 A2
16 26
18 28
15 25
Supply terminals
Output contact
Output indication
Rough time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
Output contact
15 25
Output contact t t
11
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
!
For gradual switching of heavy powers (e.g. el.heating), prevents current strokes in the main
!
Function: 2x Delay ON (2 time relays in one)
!
Time scale 0.1s - 10 days divided into 10 time ranges:
0.1s - 1s / 1s - 10s / 0.1min - 1min / 1min - 10min / 0.1h - 1h / 1h - 10hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days / ON / OFF
!
Times t1 and t2 are independantly adjustable
!
t1 and t2 are switched on after supply voltage connection
!
Rought time setting via rotary switch
!
Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 2 x changeover /DPDT 16 A
!
Output indication: multifunction red LED, fl ashing at certain states
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
SJR-2 /230V: 8595188116015
SJR-2 /UNI: 8595188117401
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Power input (apparent/loss):
Supplyvoltagetolerance:
Supplyindication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Time ranges
SJR-2
2x delay ON
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
rotaty switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
Symbol
A1
A2
16 18 26 28
15 25
Description
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW multifunction red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5 max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
UNI - 88 g (3.1 oz.), 230 - 83 g (2.9 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Supply voltage indication
Rought time setting t1
Fine time setting t1
Rought time setting t2
Fine time setting t2
Connection
Un
A1 A2
25 26 28
15 16 18
A1 A2
25 26 28
15 16 18
U
15-18
25-28
Function
t1
t2
Supply voltage terminals
U
15-18
25-28
LED
t1 t2
Output indication
Output contact
Output contact
0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 h
1 - 10 hrs 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days only ON only OFF
12
Delay ON star/delta
CRM-2T
EAN code
CRM-2T /230V: 8595188112291
CRM-2T /UNI: 8595188112437
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Supply indication:
Time scale:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
Delay ON star / delta
U
15-18
25-28
t1
t2
CRM-2T
1
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V/AC 50 - 60 Hz
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED t1: 0.1 s - 100 days, t2: 0.1 s-1 s potentiometer
5% - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW multifunction red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5 max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 max.1x 2.5, 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
84 g (3 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
!
It serves for delay ON of motors star/delta
!
Time t1 (star) - time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges
- rough time setting by rotary switch
!
Time t2 (delay) between / :
- time scale 0.1 s - 1 s
- fi ne time setting by potentiometer
!
Voltage range: AC 230 V, AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT 16A
!
Output indication: multifunction red LED
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol
A1
A2
Connection CRM-2T
Start up of motor( - )
(motor)
( )
S1 S3 S2
( )
L1
L2
L3
Description
Supply indication
Rought time setting t1
Fine time setting t1
Fine time setting t2
A1 A2
16 18 26 28
15 25 start of a motor auxiliary voltage
25 26 28
15 16 18
A1 A2
CRM-2T
25 26 28
15 16 18
( ) ( )
U
15-18
25-28
LED
230 V
LED
24-480V
Supply terminals
Output indication multifunction red
t1
t2
Output contact
Output contact
Time ranges t1: m
1
10
1 10
h
1
10
d m
1
10
1 10
h
1
10
d m
1
10
1 10
h
1
10
d m
1
10
1 10
h
1
d
10
m
1
10
h
1 10
1
10
d
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 h
h h h h h m
1
10
1 10
1
d
10
m
1
10
1 10
1
d
10
m
1
10
1 10
1
d
10
m
1
10
1 10
1
d
10
m
1
10
1 10
1
10
d
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
1 - 10 hrs 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days 3 - 30 days 10 - 100 days
13
Asymmetric cycler
CRM-2H
EAN code
CRM-2H /230V: 8595188124201
CRM-2H /UNI: 8595188113007
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Power input
(apparent input/loss input)
:
Operating range:
Supply indication:
Time scale:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity:
Dimensions:
Weight
Standards:
CRM-2H
2 (function is chosen by connecting S-A1)
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 100 days rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
!
Cycler with independent adjustable switch ON/OFF
!
Used for regular room ventilation, cyclic dehumidifi cation, light control, circulating pumps, noon signs, etc.
!
2 time functions:
1) Cycler beginning with pulse
2) Cycler beginning with pause
!
Function choice is done by an external jumper of terminals S-A1
!
Time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day /1 day - 10 days /
3 days - 30 days / 10 days - 100 days)
!
Rough time setting via rotary switch
!
Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A
!
Output indication: multifunction red LED
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Connection
A1
S A2
16 18
15
Cycler beginning with pulse Cycler beginning with pause
(jumper S-A1)
+
A1 S A2
-
15 16 18
A1 S A2
15 16 18
-
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW multifunction red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5 max. 150 ms
Function
Cycler beginning with pulse Cycler beginning with pause
U
15-18
t1 t2 t1
t2
t1
U
S
15-18
t2 t1 t2
t1 t2
Description
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
UNI - 65 g (2.3 oz.), 230 - 61 g (2.2 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Supply indication
Rought time setting -IMPULSE
Fine time setting-IMPULSE
Rough time setting -PAUSE
Fine time setting -PAUSE
A1 S A2
Supply terminals
Terminal for function selection
U
15-18
LED
Output indication multifunction LED
t1 t2 t1
Time ranges m
1
10
1 10
h
1
d
10
m
1
10
1 10
h
1
10
d m
1
10
1 10
h
1
10
d m
1
10
h
1 10
1
10
d m
1
10
1 10
h
1
10
d
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 h
m
1
10
1 10
h
1
d
10
m
1
10
h
1 10
1
d
10
m
1
10
h
1 10
1
d
10
m
1
10
1 10
h
1
d
10
m
1
10
1 10
h
1
10
d
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
10
S
1
30
100
1 - 10 hrs 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days 3 - 30 days 10 - 100 days
15 16 18
Output contact
14
Multifunction time relay CRM-61
EAN code
CRM-61 /UNI: 8595188120210
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Supply voltage :
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Control. voltage:
Control power input:
Load between S-A2:
Glow-tubes:
Control. terminals:
Max. capacity of cable control:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
CRM-61
6
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) a DC 24 V
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 10 h rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A/ AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC multifunction red LED 8 A / AC1
1x10 7
1x10 5
UNI
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W
Yes
No
A1-S
0.1μF min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 120 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
max. 2x 2.5, max. 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5, 2x1.5 mm
2
(AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
69 g (2.4 oz. )
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
!
Multifunction time relay (6 functions and 6 time ranges), economic version of CRM-91H
!
To be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps, fans, etc.
!
6 functions: - 3 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 3 time functions controlled by control input
!
Easy to use function and time-range setting by rotary switches
!
Time scale 0.1 s - 10 hrs divided into 6 range:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h rs/ 1 hrs - 10 hrs )
!
Universal Voltage range: AC 24-240 V, DC 24 V
!
Output contact: 1x changeover 8 A/ SPDT
!
Multifunction red LED output indicator fl ashes or shines depending of status
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Connection
Function
a
U t t b d e k
U t t
U t tt t t t t
S
S <t t t t i
S A2
Description
S
Supply indication
A1 t
16 18 t
15
A2 A1
S
16
15 18
Delay ON after energization
Delay OFF after energization
Un
Cycler beginning with impulse after energization
A2 A1
S
CRM-61
Delay OFF after de-energization, instant make of output
Impulse relay with delay, press its delay ON and next press its delay OFF output if it happens before expiration time
Delay ON after make of the switch till break
Supply terminals
Control input „S“
Output indication
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
16
15 18
Output contact
15
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Voltage drop on switch:
Load on B1 terminal:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Power on control input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Glow tubes connections:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
EAN code
CRM-91 /230V:
CRM-91 /UNI:
CRM-93H /230V:
CRM-93H /UNI:
CRM-9S /UNI:
8595188112444
8595188112420
8595188112789
8595188112468
8595188116008
CCA
!
Multifunction time relay can be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps and fans (10 functions, 10 time ranges, multi-voltage, 16Amps or 3x8Amps contacts)
!
Fulfi lls all requirements for time relays
!
10 functions: - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 4 time functions controlled by control input
- 1 function of latching relay
!
Comfortable and well-arranged function and time-range setting by rotary switches
!
Time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs /
1 hrs - 10 hrs /0.1 day - 1 day/ 1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF)
!
CRM-91H, CRM-93H: Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V,
Output contact: CRM-91H: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A; CRM-93H: 3 x changeover/SPDT 8 A
!
CRM-9S: Universal supply voltage AC 12 - 240 V AC 12 - 240 V, absolutely noise-less switching
1x static contactless output (triac) 01.7 A (60A/<10 ms), switches potential A1
!
Multifunction red LED output indicator fl ashes or shines depending of status
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
CRM-9S Symbol Connection CRM-91H CRM-93H
10
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12VA / 1.3W
AC max. 12VA / 1.9W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 10 days rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
AC 12-240V (50-60Hz)
AC max. 0.35VA
x x
CRM-91H
A1
S A2
CRM-93H
16 18
15
+
A1 S A2
-
15 16 18
+
A1 S A2
-
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16A / AC1
4000VA / AC1, 384W / DC
30A / <3s
3x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8A / AC1
2000VA / AC1, 192W / DC
10A / <3s
250V AC1 / 24V DC
500mA x x multifunction red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
1x static contactless output (triac)
0.7A
x
60A / <10ms x x max. 0.9 V at I max.
Yes / I max. 0.7 A
> 10 8
>10 8
A1
S A2
16 18 26 28 36 38
15 25 35
35 36 38
25 26 28
15 16 18
Possibility to connect load onto controlling input
It is possible to connect the load (e.g.: contactor) between terminals
S-A2, without any interruption of correct relay function.
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V), AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA (AC 12 - 240 V)
YES
A1-S
YES
NO
UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO
230 V - max.20 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms glow lamps cannot connected/NO x max. 250 ms
Un
+ load
A1
S A2
16 18
15
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV(supply-output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
x
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
(UNI) - 64 g (2.26 oz.); (230) - 62 g (2.2 oz.) (UNI) - 89 g (3.1 oz.); (230) - 87 g (3 oz.) 51 g (1.8 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
CRM-9S
A1 /B1
S A2
18 18
A1 S A2
B1 18 18
16
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
Function
On Delay (Power On)
When the input voltage U is applied, timing delay t begins. Relay contacts R change state after time delay is complete. Contacts R return to their shelf state when input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
a
Interval (Power On)
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately and timing cycle begins. When time delay is complete, contacts return to shelf state. When input voltage U is removed, contacts will also return to their shelfstate. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
b
Repeat Cycle (Starting Off )
When input voltage U is applied, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts R change state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
c
U
U
U t t t t t t t t t t
Single Shot
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal
S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the preset time t begins. During time-out, the trigger signal S is ignored. The relay resets by applying the trigger switch S when the relay is not energized.
Single Shot Trailing Edge (Non-Retriggerable)
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal
S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the preset time t begins. At the end of the preset time t, the relay contacts R return to their normal condition unless the trigger switch S is opened and closed prior to time out t (before preset time elapses). Continuous cycling of the trigger switch
S at a rate faster than the preset time will cause the relay contacts R to remain closed. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state
On/Off Delay
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is closed, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts
R change state and remain transferred until trigger switch S is opened.
If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
f g h
S
S
S
Latching relay
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. Output changes state with every trigger switch S closure. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
i
S t t t t
Repeat Cycle (Starting On)
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately and time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, contacts return to their shelf state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
d
U t t t t t t
Off Delay (S Break)
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is closed, relay contacts R change state. When trigger switch S is opened, delay t begins. When delay t is complete, contacts R return to their shelf state.
If trigger switch S is closed before time delay t is complete, then time is reset. When trigger switch S is opened, the delay begins again, and relay contacts R remain in their energized state. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
e
Time ranges m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1s
S m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 s
t t
Pulse generator
Upon application of input voltage U, a single output pulse of 0.5 seconds is delivered to relay after time delay t. Power must be removed and reapplied to repeat pulse. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
j
m
1
10
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1 min
m
1
10
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 min
U t t m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1 h
t t t t m
10
1 h
1 10
10
S
1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 hrs
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1 day
m
1
10 h
1 10
10
S
1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 days
m
1
10 h
1 10
10
S
1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only ON
m
10
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
10
S
1
ON
OFF
only OFF
Description
Supply indication
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
A1 S A2
Supply terminals
Control input “S”
Output indication-multifunction LED
Examples of signaling
Function: a U
15-18
LED t
Function:e U
S
15-18
LED t
15 16 18
Output contact
Notes
1) CRM-93H doesn’t allow switching of diff erent phases or 3-phase voltages.
2) When mounting into steal-plated switchboards, it is necessary keep safety distance of min. 3 mm from terminal’s screws 35-36-38 and 25-26-28 towards the shutter of a switchboard.
17
Time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
!
Control by external control unit - potentiometer (can be for example on switch board doors or in panel)
!
CRM-91HE: multifunction time relays
10 functions - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 4 time functions controlled by control input
- 1 function of latching relay time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day /
1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF)
!
CRM-2HE: asymmetric cycler
2 time functions - cycler beginning with pulse
- cycler beginning with gap function selected via external wired link on control input S-A1
!
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE :
!
Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
!
Output contact: 1x changeover 16 A/SPDT
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
Possible to connect external potentiometer - max. distance 10m (32.8 ft.) from relay
CRM-2HE
Symbol
EAN code
CRM-91HE /UNI + potentiometr: 8595188142052
CRM-2HE /UNI + potetiometr: 8595188142069
Potentiometr for CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE : 8595188125215
Technical parameters
CRM-91HE
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Control. voltage:
Consumption of input:
Load between S-A2:
Glow-tubes:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
10 2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 10 days 0.1 s - 100 days rotary switch, external potentiometer
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW multifunction red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
UNI
AC 0.025-0.2VA / DC 0.1-0.7W
Yes
No
A1-S min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
77 g (2.7 oz.) 78 g (2.8 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
B1
B2
B3
B4*
A1
A2
*B4 only for CRM-2HE
Connection
CRM-91HE
CRM-2HE
Setting of
IMPULSE
Setting of
PAUSE
A1 S A2
B1 B3 B2
15 16 18
A1 S A2
B1 B3 B2
B1 B4 B2
15 16 18
Potentiometer to CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
16 18
15
Control input “S”
Supply voltage indication
Rought time setting
A1 S A2
B1 B3 B2
Function setting
Description
15 16 18
Control input “S”
Supply voltage indication
Rought time setting-IMPULSE
Rought time setting-PAUSE
A1 S A2
B1 B4 B2
CRM-2HE
B1
B1 B4 B2
15 16 18 external control unit
Supply terminals
Intup for external time control
Output indication
-multifunction LED
Example of signaling
U
15-18
LED
h
t
15-18
LED
U
S t
Free position
Output contact
Supply terminals
Input for external time contol - IMPULSE
Output indication-
-multifunction LED
Input for external control time-PAUSE
Output contact
Potentiometer
Function
Functions of CRM-91HE are identical with CRM-91H.
Functions of CRM-2HE are identical with CRM-2H.
Potentiometer:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Weight:
Dimensions:
47 kΩ, linear
IP 65 from front side/ IP 20 from back side
1.5 mm 2 with sleeve / without sleeve max.2.5 (AWG 12)
15 g (0.5 oz.) see page Accessories
18
Plug-in time relay PRM-91H, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
!
!
Multifunction time relays are equivalents by module types of relay, designed to standardized plump 11 or 8pin socket
Pin type enables easy changing, replacement older type of relays (pin-compatible) or easy changing auxiliary relay for time relays
!
Multifunction time relay PRM-91H
11 and 8 pin type
10 time functions, time scale from 0.1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 1x 16 A / 4000VA, 250V AC1
!
Multifunction time relay PRM-92H
11 pin type
10 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1
!
Asymmetric cycler PRM-2H
11 pin type
2 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 100 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1
!
!
!
Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
Output indication: multif. red LED, fl ashing at certain states
PLUG-IN relays
EAN code
PRM-91H-8 /UNI
PRM-91H-11 /UNI
PRM-92H /UNI
PRM-2H /UNI
8595188135511
8595188111638
8595188111096
8595188111645
Technical Parameters
Number of functions:
Supply:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Control. voltage:
Control power input:
Load between 5-10:
Glow-tubes:
Control terminals:
Max. capacity of cable control:
-without connected glow-lamps:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PRM-91H/8 PRM-91H/11 PRM-92H PRM-2H
Symbol
10 2 pins 2 and 7 pins 2 and 10 pins 2 and 10 pins 2 and 10
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
LEGEND TO DESCRIPTION polarity- outputs/number on module/on socket
PRM-91H
11 pin
A1/2/+
4 3
8 pin
A1/2/+ 4 3
PRM-92H, PRM-2H
A1/2/+
4 3 8 9
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.1 s - 10 days 0.1 s - 100 days rotaty switch and potentiometer
5 A2/10/-
5 % - mechanical setting
1
5 A2/10/-
1 11
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
Connection
PRM-92H/11 PRM-91H/8
Recommended socket for DIN rail
ES-11A ES-8
5
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1 8A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
30 A / <3 s 10 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW multifunction red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
4
3
2
5
+
1
6
11
7
8
9
10
-
3
4
2
+
Description / Connection
1
8
-
6
7
11 pin
8 pin
Supply indication in the supply voltage range
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI)
Yes
No
2 - 5
0.1μF min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
2.5 kV any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
50 x 38 x 53 mm (2˝ x 1.5˝ x 2.1˝)
57 g (2.01 oz.) 57 g (2.01 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Time ranges of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H.
Time ranges of PRM-2H are identical with CRM-2H. See page 17.
Functions PRM-2H
Choice Function in PRM-2H is done by connecting terminals 2 and 5
Cycler beginning with pulse
U
2 5
R t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2
Cycler beginning with pause
U
2 5
S
R t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 d
Output indication
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
Supply indication
Output indication
Rought time setting IMPULSe
Fine time setting IMPULSe
Rought time setting PAUSE
Fine time setting PAUSE
Functions of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H. See page 17.
19
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
EAN code
PDR-2A /230V:
PDR-2A /UNI:
PDR-2B /230V:
PDR-2B /UNI:
8594030333037
8594030333044
8594030333051
8594030333068
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Time ranges:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical strength (AC1):
Control
Control input Burden:
Glow lamps:
Control. impulse length:
Reset time:
Display - colour:
Number and height of digits:
Luminace:
Light wavelength:
Brightness setting:
Memory - memory locations:
Data stored for:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Multifunction programmable digital relay with 4 digit red LED display
!
Control and setting is done by 3 buttons, user-friendly menu, absolute accuracy in timer setting, time countdown on a display galvanically separated START and STOP control inputs with UNI supply
!
Thanks to its complexity it is possible to program also more demanding time functions by using 2 independent times
!
2 independent times, with combination of 2 inputs and 2 outputs
!
PDR-2/A: 16 functions, choice of functions of the other relay, 30 memory places for most frequently used times
!
PDR-2/B: 10 functions, 1 output of 10 functions can be assigned to each relay = 2 relays in one device
!
2 independent times in range: 0.01 s - 100 hrs
!
Supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
PDR-2/A PDR-2/B
16 10
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.5 - 2.5 VA / DC 0.4 - 2.5 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 16 VA / 2.5 W
-15 %; +10 %
0.01 s - 100 h
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
Symbol
PDR-2
IN1
IN1
IN2
IN2
Description
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
Supply terminals
AC 0.01 - 0.25 VA (UNI), AC 0.25 VA (AC 230 V)
No min. 1 ms / max. unlimited max. 200 ms red
4 positions with separating colon, height 10 mm (0.39˝)
2200 - 3800 ucd
635 nm range 20 - 100 % in 10 steps adjustable
30 (PDR-2/A) / 20 (PDR-2/B) for times ranges + service function min. 10 years
Indication of operating times
(t1, t2)
Controlling buttons
Output 1
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
(UNI) - 143 g( 5 oz. ), (230) - 134 g( 4.7 oz. )
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Time data
Time range:
Minimal time step:
Time deviation:
Setting error:
Setting, reset accuracy:
Digital places:
A1
A2
16 18 26 28
15 25
26 25 28 18 15 16
0.01 s - 99 h 59 min 59 sec 99 ss
0.01 s
0.01 % of set value
0 %
100 % selected via program
Control inputs
Indication of time
(h, m, s)
Indication of output status
Output 2
20
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
Connection
PDR-2/A
Un
START input
A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2
PDR-2
STOP input t1 t2 mode stop
h m start s out 1 out 2
PDR-2/B
Un
START input for output 1
(t1)
START input for output 2 (t2)
A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2
PDR-2 t1 t2 mode stop
h m start s out 1 out 2
Function
Functions for PDR-2/A and PDR-2/B
1. Delay ON
A1-A2
15-18
16 15 18 28 25 26 output 1
16A AC1/250V output 2
16A AC1/250V t1
16 15 18 28 25 26 output 1
16A AC1/250V output 2
16A AC1/250V
Functions for PDR-2/A
11. Cycler beginning with impulse with
A1-A2 variable interval
15-18 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1
2. Delay OFF
A1-A2
15-18 t1
12. Cycler beginning with pause with variable interval
A1-A2
15-18 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1
3. Delay ON after break of control. contact
A1-A2
START
15-18 t1
4. Delay ON at make of control. contact
A1-A2
START
15-18
5. Delay OFF after break of output contact
A1-A2
START
15-18
6. Delay OFF at make of output contact
A1-A2
START
15-18
7. Delay OFF at break of control. contact with instant output
A1-A2
START
15-18
8. Delay OFF at make of control. contact with delayed output
A1-A2
START
15-18
9. Cycler beginning with impulse
A1-A2
15-18 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1
13. Generator of impulse
A1-A2
START
15-18 t1
14. Changeover star/delta
15A. Shift of pulse by 2 times
A1-A2
15-18
25-28
A1-A2
START
15-18 t1 t1
15B. Shift of impulse by 2 times
16A. Extended impulse by 2 times
16B. Extended impulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18 t1
A1-A2
START
15-18 t1
A1-A2
START
15-18 t1 t2 t2 t2 t2 t2 t2 t1 t2
10. Cycler beginning with pause
A1-A2
15-18 t1
Recommendation:
PDR-2/B is replacing by 2 simple time relays = 2 in one.
t1 t1 t1 t1 t1
21
Digital time switch clock SHT
EAN code
SHT-1 /230V:
SHT-1 /UNI:
SHT-1/2 /230V:
SHT-1/2 /UNI:
SHT-3 /230V:
SHT-3 /UNI:
SHT-3/2 /230V:
8595188130424
8595188130431
8595188130400
8595188130417
8595188136761
8595188136754
8595188129015
SHT-3/2 /UNI: 8595188129046
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Back-up supply:
Summer/winter time:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Minimum interval:
Data stored for:
Cyclic output:
Pulse output:
Program circuit
Number of memory places:
Program (SHT-1; SHT-1/2):
Program (SHT-3; SHT-3/2):
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Polution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
This time switch clock SHT is used to control various appliances in real time; daily, weekly, monthly and annual mode
!
Switching: according the program (AUTO)/constantly manually, manually to next program change/random (CUBE)
Output
Time programm
1 channel 2 channel day week month year
!
„Holiday program” option to choose an interval when the device doesn´t switch according to the standard program, but will be block during that time
!
Automatic conversion summer / winter time
!
Sealable cover of front panel, easy controlling via 4 buttons
!
100 memory places, clear LCD display, min. interval 1 s
!
Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V
!
Cyclic output
!
Pulse output
!
SHT-1, SHT-3: one channel version, 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals
!
SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2: two channel version, 2-MODULE, an individual program can be run on each channel
SHT-1, SHT- 3 SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.5 - 2 VA / DC 0.4 - 2 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 14 VA / 2 W
-15 %; +10 % yes automatic
Symbol
SHT-1
SHT-3
A1
A2
16 18
15
SHT-1/2
SHT-3/2
A1
A2
16 18 26 28
15 25
Connection
SHT-1
SHT-3
A1 16 15 18
SHT-1/2
SHT-3/2
A1 16 15 18
1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO
2
) 2x changeover/DPDT (AgSnO
2
)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
Un
A2
Description of displayed elements on the screen
up to 3 years max. ±1s/ day at 23 °C (73.4 °F)
1 min min. 10 years
1-99s
1-99s
100 daily, weekly
daily, weekly, monthly, yearly (up to year 2095)
LCD display, with back light mode choice output switching indication (1st channel) output ON/OFF random switching mode manual switching mode channel 1(bargraph)
Description
Supply terminals (A1)
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 10 clips, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝)
(UNI) - 130 g (4.6 oz.), (230) - 110 g(3.9 oz.) (UNI)- 143 g 143 g (5 oz.), (230) - 125 g (4.4 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Display
Reset
Sealing spot
Supply terminals (A2)
0
1 2
Auto
3 4 5 6 7
Prog
Man
6 12 18
Auto
24
Un
A1 16 15 18
7
0
SHT-3
6
RESET
12
PRG
+
MAN 1
MAN 2
ESC
OK
A2 26 25 28
A2 26 25 28
shows the day in the week
indication of the pulse/ cyclic output indication (2nd channel)
AM/PM shows summer / winter mode indication of closed output channel 2 (bargraph)
Channel 1
(16-15-18)
Transparent cover
Controlling buttons
Channel 2(26-25-28)
only for SHT-1/2, SHT-3 /2
22
Digital time switch with an astronomical program SHT-4
EAN code
SHT-4 8595188144759
Technical parameters
Power supply terminals:
Supply voltage:
Input power:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Real time back-up:
Transition to summer / winter time:
Output
Number of contacts:
Rated current:
Switching power:
Peak current:
Switching voltage:
Min. DC switching power:
Mechanical service life:
Electrical service life (AC1):
Timing circuit
Real time reserve:
Accuracy of operation:
Minimum triggering interval:
Program data storage period:
Programming circuit
Number of memory locations:
Program:
Data display:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Polution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Plug-in module
With battery
Type of backup battery:
SHT-4
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 14 VA / 2 W
-15 %; +10 % yes automatic
2 x changeover (AgSnO
2
)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
> 3x10
7
> 0.7x10
5 up to 3 years max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C
1 minute
10 years at minimum
100 daily, yearly (until 2099)
LCD display, backlight
-20.. +55°C
-30.. +70 °C
4 kV (power supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 10 terminals, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm
2
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm
133 g
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
!
!
Used for controlling the lighting (billboards, advertisements, shop windows, etc.) with no light sensor required
Function:
- by entering the geographic coordinates, the lighting can be switched on/off by sunrise and sunset
!
the preset coordinates for European cities, with optional manual adjustment of the geographical coordinates
!
during programming, 120 minutes may be added to the time of sunrise and sunset
!
selection of ON/OFF functions at sunrise or sunset
- astro-clock with adjustable interruption
- operating hours counter for each channel
!
- timer - switching on the basis of real-time
Two-channel design, where each channel is programmable independently of the other
!
!
Automatic switching between winter and summer time
Sealable transparent cover on the front panel
!
!
Data and time backup using the battery
Battery life - up to 3 years
!
!
Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required
Supply voltage: AC 230 V
!
2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Wiring
A1
A2
16 18 26 28
15 25
Description of items displayed on the screen
Displaying the day in week
Status indication (1st channel)
Status indication (2nd channel)
Date display of setup menu
Time display
Control button PRG+
Reset
Control button MAN1 / -
Device description
Supply voltage terminal (A1)
Backlight display
SHT-4
Auto + t Prog Man
Auto
Un
A1 16 15 18
SHT-4
RESET
MAN 2
PRG +
MAN
_
ESC
OK
A1 16 15 18
A2 26 25 28
Operation mode indication
Displays 12/24 hour mode
Indication of the switching program
Control button MAN2 / ESC
Control button OK
Output - Channel 1 (16-15-18)
Control buttons
Lead-sealing point
A2 26 25 28
Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery
Supply voltage terminal (A2) Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28)
Without battery
CR 2032 (3V)
23
The SHT-6 time switch with DCF managing
EAN code
SHT-6 8595188148382
DCFR-1 8595188148412
Technical parameters
Terminals Supply
Voltage Supply:
Tolerance of voltage supply:
Output
Number of contacts:
Rated current:
Switching capacity:
Peak current:
Max. switching voltage:
Minimum switching capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Backup real. time:
Running accuracy:
Without DCF receiver
Minimum switching interval:
Data retention programs:
Program circuit
Number of memory locations:
Program:
Displayed data:
Other information
Working temperature:
Storage temperature:
Dielectric strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection:
Over voltage category:
Degree of pollution:
Cable size (mm
2
)
Dimension:
Weight:
Related standards
Plug-in module
With battery
Type of backup battery:
24
NEW
DCFR-1
SHT-6
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
1 x changeover (AgSnO
2
)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
> 3x10
7
> 0.7x10
5 up to 3 years max. ±1 s a day with 23°C
1 min min. 10 years
100 daily, yearly ( till year 2099 )
LCD display with backlight
-10.. +55°C
-30.. +70 °C
4 kV (output supply) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP10 terminals, IP40 from the front panel
III.
2
max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4 with max. ferrule 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm
2
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm
140 g
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Used for controlling appliances depending on real time, that is synchronized by a DCF 77 signal, thanks to the automatic time settings (with DCF 77 signal) it eliminates inaccuracies and errors by time running
1 channel design with external DCF receiver
Automatic switching between winter/summer time
Sealable cover of the front panel
100 memory locations
Backlit LCD display
Switching according to the program: auto / manual / random / holiday program
Backing up data and time using the battery
Reserve battery for up to 3 years
Easy replacement for the backup battery with plugging module without detaching the device
Power supply: AC 230V
2-MODULE, mounting on DIN rail
Symbol Connection
N
DCF
B1 B2 A1 16 18
A1 G B1 B2
DCFR-1
A2 15
A2 16 15 18
L
Description of the displayed elements on the screen
Displaying the day of the week
Status indication ( 1st channel )
Status indication ( 2nd channel )
Diplaying the set-up menu data
Displaying the time
Control button PRG / +
Reset
Control button MAN1 / -
Description
Terminal N
Backlit display
SHT-6
Auto + t Prog Man
Indication of operating mode
Displaying 12/24 h
Indication of the switching
Control button MAN2 / ESC
Control button OK
Connecting the receiver DCFR-1
SHT-6
RESET
MAN 2
PRG +
MAN
_
ESC
OK
Control buttons
Sealing place
Plug module for replacement battery backup
Terminal L Output - channel (16-15-18)
Without battery
CR 2032 (3V)
DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77
!
Universal DCF module, which is designed for controlling the SHT-6 timer, and other devices.
!
!
Outdoor applications (IP65)
Two-wire connection - not polarity sensitive!
!
!
Length of connecting cable is up to 100 m
Visual indication of proper function module
Technical parameters
Connection:
Max. cross-connection conductors:
Max voltage on the wires:
Indication Function:
Other information
Storage temperature:
Protection:
Dimension:
Weight:
Operating position:
The reception area:
DCFR-1
2 conductors
2.5 mm 2
10 V red LED
-30.. +70 °C
IP65
98 x 62 x 34 mm
110 g perpendicular to the direction of reception about 1500 km from Frankfurt / Main
Working position - options
Income (input) direction
Connected to SHT-6 max. 100 m
LED
25
Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B
SMR-B
SMR-K
SMR-T
SMR-H
!
!
!
Multifunction relay designed for installation into a wiring box or under wall-switch in an existing electrical installation
Advantageous and fast solution for exchanging standard wall-switch for a switch controlled by time or for an impulse relay controlled by a button
More information about type and size of load for these products can be found on page 111
!
SMR-K
- 3-conductor connection, works without the connection of a neutral conductor.
- power output: 10-160 VA
- for fl awless function of the product is necessary the presence of a load R, L or C between input S and neutral wire
!
SMR-H
- 4-wire connection
- power output: 0 - 200 VA
- it can not be used for fl uorescent lamp and energy saving
bulb (capacitive load)
!
SMR-T
- 3-wire connection, works without the connection of a neutral conductor
- power output: 10 - 160 VA
- between input S and neutral wire is possible connect any load R, L, or C – that is not necessary (unlike SMR-K)
!
SMR-B
- 4-wire connection
- 10 functions
- output contact 1x16A / 4000 VA, 250V AC1
- enables switching of fl uorescent lights and also energy
saving lights
- suitable for switching loads greater than SMR-K, SMR-T,
SMR-H, for example pulse relay, stair automatic switch, switching of ladder radiators in bathrooms
- independent galvanically separated input AC/DC 5-250 V,
for example for control from a security system
EAN code
SMR-K /230V
SMR-T /230V
SMR-H /230V
SMR-B /230V
8595188145176
8595188129107
8595188129114
8595188135566
Technical parameters
SMR-K SMR-T SMR-H SMR-B
Description
Number of functions:
Connection:
Voltage range:
Power input (no operation/make):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Resistive load:
Inductive load:
Control
Control voltage:
Control current:
Impulse length:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Fuse:
Connection:
Glow-lamps in control button:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
9 10
3-wire, without neutral 4-wire, with neutral
AC 230V / 50-60Hz
0.8 / 3VA max 1 / 1VA
-15%; +10%
0.1 s - 10 days via rotaty switch
10 % - mechanical setting
2 % - set value stability
0.1 % / °C, at = 20 °C
1 x triac 1x NO(AgSnO
2
)
10 - 160 VA 0 - 200 VA 16A 125/250 V AC1
10 - 100 VA 0 - 100 VA 8A 250 V AC (cos φ > 0.4)
AC 230 V AC230V, UNI-5-250VAC/DC
25μA 3 mA min. 50ms / max. unlimited
x Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
0..+50°C any free at connecting wires
IP30 in standard conditions
III.
2
SMR-H
Output indication
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
Neutral (only in SMR-H)
Switch (button)
SMR-B
Galvanically separated control input 5-250 V AC/DC
F 1A / 250V x
3x CY, Ø 0.75 mm
2
(AWG 18) 4x sol. wir., Ø 0.75 mm
2
(AWG 18) 2 x CY, Ø 0.75mm
2
(AWG 18) lenght 90mm (3.5˝) lenght 90mm (3.5˝)
2 x CY, Ø 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 10)
Output indication
x max.10 max.20
49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝) 49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝)
26 g (0.92 oz. ) 26 g (0.92 oz. ) 27 g (0.95 oz. ) 53 g ( 1.9 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Output
Phase
Exchangeable
fuse
Output
Phase
Function setting
Neutral
Switch (button)
Time ranges m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1 s
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 hrs
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 s
m
1
10
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1 day
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1 min
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 days
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
1 - 10 min
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only ON
m
1
10 h
1 10
10
S
1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
0.1 - 1 hrs
m
10
1
10
S
1 h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
26
Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B
Function
Function a - delay OFF on entrering edge output times when it is switched. Each following pressing (max. 5x) increases time. Long pressing swithes output off
Function b - delay OFF on downward edge output times after button is swithed off , switches immediately
Function c - delay OFF on downward edge after switching off output switches on and times.
Function d - cycler - fl asher impulsem output cycles in regular interval, cycler starts with an impulse
Function e - puls shift delay on after the switch is switched on and delay on after it is switched off
Connection SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B
N
L
V tt t t 2xt t
>2 s
t t t t t t
V t t t t t t t
Function f - delay ON delay on after switch is switched on until it is switched off
Function g - impulse relay switches on by a press, another pressing switches the output off . The length of pressing doesn’t matter, it is possible to set reaction delay by a potentiometer and thus eliminate rebound of a button
Function h - impulse relay with delay one press switches on, another one switches the output off in case it is done before the end of timing
Function i - cycler starting with pause output cycles in regular intervals, cycler starts with a pause
Function j* - cycler starting with gap delay ON until switched off until it is de-energized or a switch is pressed again.
Note.: *- Function j is valid only for SMR-B
t t
V t t t t
V t t t
V L S V L S N V L S N N S L V
V
L
S
SMR-K
SMR-
SMR-T SMR-H SMR-H
Typical wiring of SMR-K, SMR-T
- timer for lamp unit
Fan control depending on the SMR-K , SMR-T lighting
Typical wiring of SMR-H
- timer for lamp unit
Fan control depending on the lighting
Input for external control voltage AC/
DC 5-250 V
Note: The products of the SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H are not intended for switching capacity load (energy saving light bulbs and LED lights with capacity power etc.), these products are only intended for switching resistive and inductive loads (incandescent bulbs, fans, etc.). For other types of traffi c is determined by the SMR-B with relays output. This output is possible to switch the load character of R, L or C-values listed in the load table. Between inputs S and neutral wire is possible to connect any load of R, L or C, however this is not (unlike the SMR-K) condition.
Example of connection SMR-T
Original connection
N
neutral wire incoming phase wire
L
N
Control of an appliance by button neutral wire incoming phase wire
L
Button
(switch)
After the light bulb switch is switched off , fan starts operating and after set time switches off .
N
neutral wire
L
incoming phase wire
Button
Switch
27
Staircase switch CRM-4
EAN code
CRM-4 /230V: 8595188115605
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Control voltage:
Power on input:
Load between S-A2:
Control terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
U switch
S t t
AUTO t
28
CRM-4
delay off reacting to control contact switching
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0.5 - 10 min potentiometer
10 % - mechanical setting
5 % - set value stability
0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
!
Used for delayed switching of lights in the corridors, entrances, stairways, halls or for delayed fi nish of fans (WC, bathroom, etc.)
!
It is controlled by a button or by several buttons from more places (connected in parallel) buttons can be equipped by glow lamps (max. 20 pcs of glow lamps)
!
Output relay contact 16 A/AC1 with surge current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and fl uorescent lamps
!
Operating system switch:
AUTO - normal Function according to set time
OFF – permanently OFF (e.g. when changing bulbs)
ON – permanently ON (e.g. while cleaning, servicing)
!
Time range: 0.5 - 10 min
!
Time setting by potentiometer
!
Supply voltage : AC 230 V
!
Protection against button blocking ( e.g. a match inserted in a button)
!
1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Connection
A1
S A2
16 18
15
It is possible to connect load between S-A2 (e.g. contactor, control of light or any other device), without disturbing a correct function of relay (load is energized while the switch is ON).
U n load
A1
S A2
16 18
15
1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO
2
)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
Circuit connection
L
N
3-wire connection 4- wire connection
L
N
A1 S A2 A1 S A2
250V AC1
16A/4000VA
250V AC1
16A/4000VA AC 230 V
AC 0.53 VA
Yes
A1-S
Yes
AC 230V - max. amount 35 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms
15 16 18
Description
A1 S A2
15 16 18
Supply terminals
Controlling contact
Output indication
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
62 g (2.2 oz.)
EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1
Supply indication
Operating system swich
Time setting
OFF
ON
15 16 18
Output contact
EAN code
CRM-42 /230V: 8595188136693
CRM-42F /230V: 8595188146883
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Electrical life (AC5b):
Control
Control voltage:
Input Burden:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Programmable staircase switch with signalling before switch off CRM-42, CRM-42F
CRM-42 / CRM-42F
delay OFF responsive to control contact switch on
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
Mode AUTO: 0.5 - 10 min, Mode PROG potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
5 % - set value stability
0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Intelligent staircase switch, the same use as CRM-4, but with enlarged possibility of control in mode „PROG“, it is possible to select time of delayed OFF by number of button pressing. Each pressing multiplies time set by potentiometer, it means that in case you set time to 5 min and press the button 3 times, then the output is automatically prolonged to 15 min. Output can be also switched off before time (reset) by long pressing of button (longer than 2 sec)
Output relay contact 16A/AC1 with inrush current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and also fl uorescent lights
Operating system switch:
ON - output is constantly ON (service mode)
AUTO - timing according to adjusting by potentiometer in range 30 s - 10 min
PROG - timing with time prolongation option by number button pressing
Timing (in mode AUTO and PROG) is possible to be stopped by long pressing of the button (> 2 s)
Voltage range: AC 230 V, clamp terminals
Output indication: multif. red LED, fl ashing at certain states
Possibility to connect up to 100 buttons equipped with glow lamps (in total 100mA)
3-wire or 4-wire connection (it is possible to control input S by potential A1 or A2)
Warning before switch OFF- output doublefl ash 40 and 30 sec before switch OFF
CRM-42F: Staircase switch without warning fl ashes especially suited for use with energy-saving lamps, where frequent fl ashing may cause damage to the light source
1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Connection
N
L
3- wire connection 4- wire connection
A2 S
A1 18
N
L
A2 S
A1 18
Description
1x NO - SPST(AgSnO
2
), switches potencial A1
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
8x10
4
(bulbs 1000 W) *
Supply terminal A2
Supply indication
Operating system switch
Time setting
A2 S
Controlling input
Output indication multifunction red LED
AC 230 V
AC 0.53 VA
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
A1-S or A2-S min. 50 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5, (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
65 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1
Supply terminal A1
Function
MODE ON
U
S
18
red LED
Symbol
A1
S A2
400ms
A1 18
18
red LED
U
S
MODE AUTO
t
2s
Output contact
MODE PROG (the illumination time is defi ned by number of button pressing)
U
>2s
S
18
red LED
t t t t t t
18
t
* For bigger bulb loads and frequent switching is recommended to intensify the contact relay with power contactor e.g. VSXXX
29
30
Notes
Auxiliary and Power relays
VS(B,K)
VS116B/230
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A.
VS116K
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A.
VS308K
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/ SPDT 8A.
VS316/24
Supply voltage :
AC/DC 24 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/SPDT 16 A, possibility to be connected into 3-phase circuit.
VS316/230
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/ SPDT 16 A, possibility to be connected into 3-phase circuit.
VS(U)
782L
782L
Power relays plug-in
Output contacts: 4 x changeover contact/
SPDT 6 A
Plug-in type.
VS116U
Supply voltage :
AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
750L
ES-15/4NA - socket
Max. voltage: 12 A
Weight: 59 g
Mounting to DIN rail
Designated for 4-contact relay.
Other features
750L
Power relays plug-in
Output contacts:
3 x changeover contact /
SPDT 10 A
Plug-in type.
VS308U
Supply voltage :
AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/ SPDT 8 A.
ES-11A- socket
Max. current: 10 A
Weight: 60 g
Monting to DIN rail
Designated for 3-contact relay.
VS116B/230
VS116K
VS116U
VS308K
VS308U
VS316/24
VS316/230
782L
750L
MINI
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
PLUG-IN
PLUG-IN
AC 230 V/50-60 Hz
AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 12..240 V
AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 12..240 V
AC/DC 24 V
AC 230 V
AC 6-230 V,
DC 6-110 V
AC 6-230 V,
DC 6-110V
1x16 A changeover/
SPDT
1x16 A changeover/
SPDT
1x16 A changeover/
SPDT
3x8 A changeover/
3PDT
3x8 A changeover/
3PDT
3x16 A changeover/
3PDT
3x16 A changeover/
3PDT
4x8 A changeover/
4PDT
3x16 A changeover/
3PDT
More about contact loadability on page 111
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
VS116/B230 MINI, with installation into junction box or ceiling that allows control of lights, shades or awnings drives as a separation relay (4kV), direct switching of appliances up to 4000VA
(e.g. heaters), well visible signalization, noiseless as VS116K, but multivoltage supply coil a “multiplication” of contacts, 3x changeover contact/ 3PDT only in 1-MODULE, well visible signalization, noiseless
32-33
32-33
32-33
32-33 as VS308K, but multivoltage supply coil
32-33
32-33
3x changeover contact in 1-MODULE, possibility of “multiplication” of contacts and in the same time possibility of switching high output, possibility of 3 phase switching as VS316/24, but AC 230V compact small relay for installation into plug relay, basic version equipped by LED indication, detent and testing lever as 782, but into 11-pin round socket,
3x changeover contact / 3PDT 16A/250V
32-33
34-35
34-35
31
Power relays modular type VS
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time between switching:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
VS116B/230
L 12 14
EAN code
see page 33
VS116B/230
L-N
AC 230 V/50-60 Hz
AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W x x x red LED min. 2s free at connecting wire
IP 30
2x 0.75 mm 2 ,
3x 2.5 mm 2
49 x 49 x 21 mm
48 g
EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
VS116K
A1
12 14
!
Power relay used for switching larger load output, strengthen or „multiplying“ contacts of the existing device
Type
VS116K
VS116U
VS116/B230
VS308K
VS308U
VS316/24
VS316/230
Current rating
16 A
16 A
16 A
8 A
8 A
16 A
16 A
3
3
1
3
3
Number of contacts
1
1
Design
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
BOX (MINI)
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
Supply terminals
A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24V AC/DC
A1 - A2 12- 240V AC
L-N 230V AC
A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24 V AC/DC
A1 - A2 12-240V AC/DC
A1 - A2 24V AC/DC
A1 - A2 230V AC
!
Relays VS316/24, VS316/230 enable connection to a 3-phase circuit
!
In the design 1-MODULE , DIN rail mounting, output status indicated by high intensity LED with choice of LED color
(red, green, yellow, blue or white LED*)
!
VS116/B230 MINI, mounting in installation box or ceilings, enabling switching of lights, motors for blinds or awnings
!
For VS116/B230 status of output indicated by LED on front panel of device
VS116K VS116U VS308K VS308U
AC 230 V/50-60 Hz
AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W
A1-A3
AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz)
AC 1 VA/ DC 1W
AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W x x x
AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC max. 10.3 VA/ 1.1 W
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
A1-A3
AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz)
AC 1 VA/ DC 1W
-15%; +10%
VS316/24
AC/DC 24 V/ 50-60 Hz
1.6 VA/ 1.2 W x x x
1 x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO
2
)
16 A/ AC1
4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC
30 A/ <3s
54 g (1.9 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.)
VS116U
A1 12 14
3 x changeover/3PDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)
8 A/ AC1
2000VA/ AC1, 192W/ DC
10 A/ <3s
250 V AC1/ 24 V DC
500 mW high intensity of LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5 min. 2s
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2 max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5
max. 1x2.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
52 g (1.83 oz.) 83g (2.9 oz.)
EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
VS308K
A1
12 14 22 24 32 34
VS316/230
AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz
2.5 VA
3 x changeover/ 3PDT (AgSnO
2
)
16A/ AC1
4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC
30 A/ <3s
20 ms
90 g (3.17 oz.)
1x10 7
1x10 5
50 ms
92 g (3.25 oz.)
VS308U
A1
12 14 22 24 32 34
N
11
A2 A3
11
A2
VS316/24 VS316/230
A1 12 14 22 24 32 34 A1 12 14 22 24 32 34
11
A2 A3 11 21 31 A2 11 21 31
Notes:
Max. time of changeover of contact is 10ms.
VS316/24 or VS316/230 enables switching of diff erent phases or 3 phase voltage.
* possibility to choose blue, white and yellow color of LED for power relays line VS in case of minimal order quantity 100 pcs.
11 21 31
A2 11 21 31
32
A2
Power relays modular type VS
Description
VS116K, VS116U
A1 A3 A2
Red/čevená
Supply terminals
Indication LED
11 12 14
Output changeover contact terminal A3 only for VS116K
VS316/24, VS316/230
2nd output changeover contact
Supply terminals
21 22 24
A1 A2
Indication LED
VS308K, VS308U
A1 A3 A2
21 22 24
Red/piros
Supply terminals
2nd output changeover contact
Indication LED
11 12 14
31 32 34
1st output changeover contact
3rd output changeover contact terminal A3 only for VS308K
VS116B/230
EAN codes
VS116U /red
VS116U /green
VS116U /yellow
VS116U /white
VS116U /blue
VS116K /red
VS116K /green
VS116K /yellow
VS116K /white
VS116K /blue
8595188124607
8595188136433
8595188138499
8595188138482
8595188138475
8595188122597
8595188122610
8595188122580
8595188122573
8595188122603
VS116B/230 8595188147543
11 12 14
31 32 34
Output changeover contact
3rd output changeover contact
VS308U /red
VS308U /green
VS308U /yellow
VS308U /white
VS308U / blue
VS308K /red
VS308K /green
VS308K /yellow
VS308K /white
VS308K /blue
8595188130103
8595188136440
8595188138529
8595188138512
8595188138505
8595188122696
8595188122719
8595188122689
8595188122672
8595188122702
Neutral wire
Phase wire
VS316 /230 red
VS316 /230 green
VS316 /230 yellow
VS316 /230 white
VS316 /230 blue
VS316 /24 red
VS316 /24 green
VS316 /24 yellow
VS316 /24 white
VS316 /24 blue
8595188135559
8595188136075
8595188136082
8595188136051
8595188136068
8595188135771
8595188136105
8595188136129
8595188136099
8595188136112
Output indication
Output changeover contact
33
Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L
34
!
Used for switching a higher power (load) than that of the switched element amplifier
!
For auxiliary lighting control, signalization, the relay interlockings, boilers, HDO, heaters
!
3x changeover contacts of 10A(AgNi) for 750L
!
4x changeover contacts of 6A(AgNi) for 782L
!
Recommended bases - ES-11A base for 750L, ES-15/4NA base for 782L
750L 782L
Technical parameters
Contacts
Number of switching contacts
Contact material:
Rated voltage:
Rated current: peak current
Switching capacity
Switching capacity
Switching capacity
Switching capacity
Minimum switching voltage / current:
Coil
Rated Voltage (DC):
Rated voltage (AC, 50-60Hz):
Rated power (AC / DC)
Tolerance of supply voltage:
Isolating data
Rated insulation voltage (AC):
Dielectric strength (AC) coil - contact: contact - contact:
Isolating resistance at 500 V DC:
Distance contact - coil air: surface:
General information
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Max. switching frequency at rated load:
Without load:
Pick-up time / returning contact:
Working temperature:
Storage temperature:
Protection:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
750L 782L
3
AgNi
AC 250 V/440 V (50 - 60 Hz)
10 A
20 A
10A/250A
3A/120V/1.5A/240V
10 A / 24 V DC
0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V
5mA/5V
1.5W/DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V
6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V
AC 2.8 VA (50Hz) /2.5 VA (60Hz)/ DC 1.5 W
-20 / +10 %
2500 V
2500 V
1500 V
10
7
Ω
≥ 3 mm
≥ 4.2 mm
≥ 2x10
7
≥ 2x10
5
10A/250V AC
1200 cycles / hrs
12000 cycles / hrs max. 12/10 ms
-40.. +55 °C (AC)
-40 .. +85 °C
IP40 from the front panel
35 x 35 x 54.4 mm
83 g
EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1
4
AgNi
AC 250 V/250 V (50 - 60 Hz)
6 A
12 A
6A/250A
1.5A/120V/0.75A/240V
6 A / 24 V DC
0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V
5mA/5V
1.5W/DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V
6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V
AC 1.6 VA/ DC 0.9 W
-20 / +10 %
2500 V
2500 V
1500 V
10
7
Ω
≥ 1.6 mm
≥ 3.2 mm
1x10
7
≥ 10
5
6A/250V AC
1200 cycles / hrs
18000 cycles / hrs max. 10/8 ms
-40.. +55 °C
-40.. +85 °C
IP40 from the front panel
27.5 x 21.2 x 35.6 mm
35 g
EN 61810-1,
EN 60255-1-00, EN 61810-7
Coil data for 782L
1024
1048
1060
1080
DC voltage
1005
1006
1012
1110
1125
1220
5127
5220
5230
5240
5080
5110
5115
5120
Product Type
AC voltage
5006
5012
5024
5042
5048
5060
Coil data for 750L
1120
1012
1024
1220
1006
1048
1060
1110
Product Type
AC voltage
5006
5012
5024
5048
5060
5115
5120
5220
5230
5240
DC voltage
Voltage[V]
AC 6
AC 12
AC 24
AC 48
AC 60
AC 115
AC 120
AC 220
AC 230
AC 240
DC 6
DC 48
DC 60
DC 110
DC 120
DC 12
DC 24
DC 220
Voltage [V]
AC 115
AC 120
AC 127
AC 220
AC 230
AC 240
AC 6
AC 12
AC 24
AC 42
AC 48
AC 60
AC 80
AC 110
DC 5
DC 6
DC 12
DC 24
DC 48
DC 60
DC 80
DC 110
DC 125
DC 220
Resistance [Ω]
475
1 840
1 910
6 980
4.3
18.5
75
305
7 080
7 760
28
1 750
2 700
9 200
11 000
110
430
37 000
Resistance[Ω]
3 610
3 770
4 000
15 400
16 100
16 800
740
930
1 720
3 450
9.8
39.5
158
470
28
40
160
640
2 600
4 000
7 100
13 600
16 000
15 400
Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L
Connection
The 750L connection The 782L connection
Socket ES-11A - for 750L
Max. Current: 10A
Weight: 60 g
Mounting on DIN rail
Designed for 3- relay contacts
ES-11A
Socket ES-15/4N - for 782L
Max. Current: 12A
Weight: 59 g
Mounting on DIN rail
Designed for 4- relay contacts
ES-15/4NA
Accessories to ES-11A - for 750L
Clip to relay 750L: 16-1351
EAN code
750L/110V DC
750L/120V AC
750L/12V AC
750L/12V DC
750L/230V AC
750L/24V AC
750L/24V DC
750L/48V DC
750L/6V AC
750L/6V DC
782L/110V DC
782L/120V AC
782L/12V AC
782L/12V DC
782L/230V AC
782L/24V AC
782L/24V DC
782L/48V AC
782L/48V DC
782L/6V AC
782L/6V DC
8595188129992
8595188130028
8595188130011
8595188129978
8595188119221
8595188119207
8595188125147
8595188129985
8595188130004
8595188129961
8595188129923
8595188129947
8595188119085
8595188119030
8595188119115
8595188119092
8595188119047
8595188129954
8595188129916
8595188129930
8595188129909
ES-15/4NA
ES-11A
ES8
Clip to relay 750L
Clip to relay 782L
8595188119245
8595188129879
8595188136167
8595188119283
8595188119276
Accessories to ES-15/4NA - for 782L
swivel label - TR1
The LED module, the protective diode and
R/C member can be assigned into the slot.
35
MODULAR
R, L
Dimmers
R, L, C
MODULAR
DIM-2
staircase switch with gradual dimming up/ down, level and time of illumination, all values are adjustable.
R = 10 -500 VA
L = 10 -250 VA
DIM-5
control by a button/ buttons ( connected in parallel), short pressing
ON/OFF, long pressing regulates brightness, memory storing.
R = 10 -500 VA
L = 10 -250 VA
MINI
DIM-14
as DIM-5 but dims all types of loads, in-built protection against temperature and current overload, electronic fuse.
R = 500 VA
L = 500 VA
C = 500 VA
DIM-15
designated for dimming of
1) LED lamps and LED lighting sources
2) dimmable energy saving fl uorescent lamps
R, L, C
LIC-1
intensity controller for maintaining the constant illumination level.
Dimmable energy saving fl uorescent lamps, LED lamps.
R,L,C, - resistive, inductive and capacitive loads
DIM-6
power dimming to 2kW.
Can be controlled by button, external potentiometer, 0-10
V (1-10 V) system iNELS.
R = 2000VA
L = 2000 VA
C = 2000VA
DIM6-3M-P
DIM6-3M-P is a power module expansion unit for
DIM-6. It cannot be operated independently.
R = 1000VA
L = 1000 VA
C = 1000VA
SMR-S
as DIM-5, but for mounting under a wall-switch into an installation box
KU-68 (or the similar),
3 wire connection (without neutral).
R = 10-300VA
L = 10-150 VA
SMR-U
as DIM-14, but for mounting under a wall-switch into an installation box
KU-68 (or the similar).
R = 1000VA
L = 1000 VA
C = 1000VA
Recommendation for mounting:
Recommendation for mounting modular dimmers: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4” ) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.
Type of dimmed load
Output
Dimming principal
SMR-M
for mounting under a wallswitch into an installation box KU-68 (or similar).
Dimmable energy saving fl uorescent lamps, LED lamps.
36
DIM-2
DIM-5
DIM-14
DIM-15
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
DIM-6 6M-DIN
DIM-6-3MP 3M-DIN
SMR-S
SMR-U
SMR-M
LIC-1
BOX
BOX
BOX
1M-DIN
AC 230V
R L C ESL LED
# # x x
R L triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA
AC 230V
# # x
Rated load
AC 230V
AC 230V
AC 230V
AC 230V
AC 230V
AC 230V
AC 230V
AC 230V
# #
-
-
-
# #
#
#
# #
# #
-
# #
# x
-
#
# x
# x x
# x
-
#
#
#
C
-
# x triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA x
# x
2x
MOSFET
500 VA* 500 VA* 500 VA*
2x
MOSFET
4x
MOSFET
#
2 000 VA*
-
2 000 VA*
#
2 000 VA* x x
2x
MOSFET
1 000 VA* 1 000 VA* 1 000 VA*
triac
10-300VA* 10-150VA
#
# x
# x
# x
2x
MOSFET
500VA*
#
#
2x
MOSFET
2x
MOSFET
#
300 VA*
500VA*
-
500VA*
#
300 VA* 300 VA*
#
#
#
Note: * - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure suffi cient cooling
Expandatory:
R, L, C
Dimmer with designatedload:
R - RESISTIVE
L - INDUCTIVE
C - CAPACITIVE
ESL - energy saving fl uorescent lamps
LED - LED lamps bulbs, halogen lamps type of load
(symbols)
Demonstrated symbols are informative
R x x
# x
# x x
#
#
# staircase switch with gradual dim-up/dim-down, level and length of illumination, all values are adjustable control by button/buttons (connected in parallel), short pressing ON/OFF, long pressing regulated brightness, memory recording as DIM-5, but dims all types of load, inbuilt protections against thermo and current overload, electronic fuse
37
38
39 designated for dimming of:
1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources
2) dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps for controlled dimming of lights up to 2kW, with a possibility of module extention up to 20kW (el.bulbs and hallogen lights, also with ballast type C or L)
42
40 is expanding power modul for controlled dimmer DIM-6 41 as DIM-5, but for mounting under a wall-switch, into a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral) is expanding power modul for controlled diммer DIM-6 as DIM-14, but for mounting under a wall-switch, into an installation box designated for dimming of:
1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources
2) dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps for maintaining the constant illumination level.
ESL dimmable compact fluorescent lamps, LED lamps,
R,L,C, - resistive, inductive and capacitive loads
44
44
42
45 low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V
WIth wound transformers
low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V
WIth electronic transformers
ESL dimmable compact fl uorescent lamps
L C ESL
LED lamps
LED
Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2
EAN code
DIM-2 /230V: 8595188112475
DIM-2-1h /230V: 8595188135740
Technical parameters:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time setting by:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coeffi cient:
Recovery time:
Controlling T1 (button)
Terminals:
Voltage:
Power on control input:
Impulse length:
Glow-lamps:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Controlling T2 (switch)
Terminals:
Voltage:
Power on control input:
Impulse length:
Output
Current rating:
Resistance load:
Inductive load:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
DIM-2
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 Hz max. 5 VA
-15 %; +10 % green LED potentiometers
10 % - mechanical setting
5 % - set value stability
0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C max.80ms
!
!
Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers
Intelligent control of halogen lights, function of gradual switching on and dimming
!
!
Controlling inputs for push button and switch
Values are set by potentiometers on front panel of the product, adjustable:
- maximum dim-up
- speed (fl uency) of dim-up
- speed (fl uency) of dim-down
- time for which a light is on with maximum dim-up
!
!
All time intervals can be adapted according to a request
Output without contact: 1x triac
!
!
Load AC 5b (el. bulbs) 500 W
Clamp terminals
!
!
Parallel connection of controlling pushbuttons is possible
Protection against over-temperature inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED fl ashing
!
!
Note: possibility of start and fi nish adjustment up on 1 hour, device has description DIM-2 1h
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Connection
T1
T2
A1
A2
V
L
A1 V
T2
T 2.5 A recomended fuse
A2 T1
R, L
T1 - A1
AC 230 V max. 1.5 VA min.100 ms /max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
Description
Supply terminal A1
N
A1 V
T2
Output
Controlling input for switch
T2 - A1
AC 230 V
0.1 VA min.100 ms /max. unlimited
Supply indication
- brightness setting
Output indication t1 - dim-up time settting
2 A
10 - 500 VA
10 - 250 VA t3 - dim-down time setting t2 - time delay setting
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
65 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
Supply terminal A2
A2 T1
Controlling input for push button
Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module (approx. 9 mm) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.
Function
Legend:
Brightness: 10-100% t1 Dim-up time: 1-40 s t2 Time delay: 0s-20min t3 Dim-down time: 1-40s
Controlled via input T1(button) t1 t2 t3
Dim-up delay-down is started by a button. Cycle extensionanother button pressing (during cycle).
Controlled via input T2 (switch) t1 t2 t3
The switch starts the cycle and it stops on max.set brightness.
After the switch is off , the cycle will continue until completed.
T1
T2
37
Controlled dimmer DIM-5
EAN code
DIM-5 /230V: 8595188115612
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Controlling
Control terminals:
Control voltage:
Power control input:
Impulse length:
Glow-lamps:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Output
Current rating:
Resistance load:
Inductive load:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
Supply
A1-A2
Output
Brightness
Controlling contact
LED
T
<0.5s
<0.5s
>0.5s
DIM-5
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 Hz max. 5 VA
-15 %; +10 % green LED
T - A1
AC 230 V max. 1.5 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
2 A
10 - 500 VA
10 - 250 VA red LED
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
58 g (2 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
!
Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers
!
For switching and dimming lights in corridors, stairways... control input for push-buttons (parallel connection possible)
!
Short press turns light on/off , longer press (> 0.5 s) provides dim up / dim down
!
When switched off , brightness level is stored in a memory and when On again it restores last brightness level
!
Voltage range: AC 230 V
!
Contactless output, triac 2A/ 500 VA
!
LED output indication (with any level of brightness)
!
Possibility to connect control buttons in parallel
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
Clamp terminals
!
Protection against over-heating inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED fl ashing
Symbol Connection
L
A1
T
A2
Description
Supply terminal A1
Supply indication
V
A1 V
N
A1 V
A2 T
T 2.5 A recomended fuse
R, L
Output
Output indication
<0.5s
>0.5s
<0.5s
Supply terminal A2
A2 T
Controlling input for push button
Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.
38
Controlled dimmer DIM-14
EAN code
DIM-14 /230V: 8595188135955
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Dissipated power:
Indication output:
Controlling
Control terminals:
Control voltage:
Power control input:
Impulse length:
Glow-lamps:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Output
Contactless:
Current rating:
Resistance load:
Inductive load:
Capacitive load:
Output state indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
Supply A1-A2
Output
Brightness
Controlling input T
<0.5s <0.5s
>0.5s
DIM-14
A1-A2
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
1.3 W
-15 %; +10 %
6 VA green LED
A1- T
AC 230 V
AC 0.3-0.6 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 20 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
2 x MOSFET
2 A
500 VA*
500 VA*
500 VA* red LED
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
58 g (2 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
>0.5s
<0.5s
!
Designed for dimming of incandescent bulbs and halogen lights with wound or electronic transformer
!
For switching and dimming of lights, control inputs for a button
!
Short impulse switches ON/OFF, longer impulse (>0.5s) enables gradual light intensity setting
!
Last intensity level is stored in memory when switched off
!
Voltage range: AC 230 V
!
Output without contacts: 2x MOSFET
!
LED output indicator with any level of brightness possibility of parallel connection of control buttons
!
Resistive, inductive or capacitive load, up to 300 W, for a short term up to 500 W
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
Electronic overvoltage protection
!
Protection against over-heating inside the device - output off
Symbol
Description
A1
T A2
Supply indication
Supply terminal A2
V
Connection
L
N
A2 T
A1 V
DIM - 14
A1 V
A2 T
DIM-14
T 2.5 A recomended front-end protection
R, L, C
Supply terminal A1
Output
Output indication
Button output
* When load is above 300 VA it is necessary to ensure suffi cient cooling.
Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.
Warning for DIM-14: it is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the same time.
39
Controlled dimmer DIM-6
2
2
2
2
!
Designed for RLC dimming lights, also available for appliance switching
!
DIM-6 can be controlled by: button (parallel button connection), external potentiometer, analog signal 0-10 V
(1-10 V), iNELS system bus
!
Actuator manages output 230 V AC, controlled by 1 semi-conductor. Maximum output power is 2000 VA
!
Power range can be increased up to 10 000 VA by module DIM6-3M-P
!
Electronic overcurrent protection, overvoltage and short-circuit protection
!
Protection against over-heating inside device - switch off output+signalize overheat by fl ashing red LED
EAN code
DIM-6 /230V: 8595188136914
Technical parameters DIM-6
!
6-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting
Supply terminals:
Supply voltageí:
Input:
Tolerance of Voltage range:
Max. output power:
Dissipated power:
Module extendable:
Galvanic separation of bus and power output:
Isul. volt. between outputs and inner circuits:
Control - button type
Control voltage:
Control terminals:
Power of control input:
Length of control impulse:
Recovery time:
Connection of glow lamps:
Control 0(1)-10V:
Control terminals:
Control voltage:
Min. current of control input:
CIB control:
Control terminals:
Bus voltage:
Current of control input:
Indication of data transmission:
Output
Contactless:
Current rating:
Resistive load:
Inductive load:
Capacitive load:
Indication of output state:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Purpose of control device:
Construction of control device:
Char. of automatic operation:
Heat and fi re resistance cat.:
Anti-stroke category (immunity):
Rated impulse voltage:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Profi le of connecting wires :
- output part:
- control part:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
L, N
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
10 VA
-15 %; +10 % max. 2 000 VA
2.5 % from load
to 10 000 VA
yes
3.75kV, SELV according to EN 60950
AC 12-240V
S - S, galvanically separated
AC 0.53VA (AC 230V), AC 0.025-0.2VA (AC 12-240V) min. 25ms / max. unlimited max. 150ms
NO (AC 230V); NO (AC 12-240V)
0(1)-10V, GND
0-10V or 1-10V
1mA
CIB+, CIB-
27V DC
5mA
yellow LED
4 x MOSFET
10 A
2 000 VA*
2 000 VA*
2 000 VA* yellow LED, according to load type
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) vertical
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
operative control device
individual control device
1.B.E
FR-0
class 2
2.5 kV
III.
2 max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 105 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 4.1˝ x 2.6˝)
410 g (14.5 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014
Device description
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Symbol
(x)
N
Types of indication LED
V
(x) - according to control type setting
- Yellow-indicates confi guration of load RL
- Yellow-indicates confi guration of load RC
- Green-button control mode selected
- Green - 0-10 V signal control mode selected
- Green – 1-10 V signal control mode selected
- Green – CIB conductor bar-INELS control mode selected
- Yellow – indicates CIB conductor bar data transfer comunication
- Red – indicates overload, fl ashing LED signalizes over-heating inside the device, shinnig LED
signalizes current overload
1
Terminals for CIB bus connection
2
Load type indication
3
Control type indication
4
CIB data transfer indication
5
Overload indication
L
R,L,C
6
Terminals for connecting control button
7
Terminals of neutral wire
8
9
Terminal for phase conductor connection
13
Terminals for control by signal
0(1)-10V, or by potentiometer
Output terminals
14
Terminal for regulation load of wire jumper
10
Button for output control
11
Button for output control
12
Terminal for additional modul conductor bar
* Warning : it is not allowed to connect inductive and capacitive loads at the same time.
13
12
11
10
9
8
40
Expanding power module DIM6-3M-P
EAN code
DIM-6-3M-P: 8595188139106
Technical parameters
Load
Dissipated power:
Output
Contactless:
Current rating:
Resistive load:
Inductive load:
Load capacity:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Controlling device purpose:
Controlling device construction:
Automatic operating char.:
Heat and fi re resistance category:
Imunity category:
Rated impuls voltage:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Profi le of connecting wires (mm
2
)
- output part:
- control part:
Size:
Weight:
Standards:
Connection
!
Expanding power module only for use in combination with DIM-6
!
DIM6-3M-P provides power increasement (of about 1000VA) of load connected to DIM-6
(it means: 2 000VA (DIM-6) + 1 000VA (DIM6-3M-P) = 3 000VA)
!
DIM-6 can be connected with up to 8 DIM6-3M-P to expand power up to 10 000 VA
!
Attention-device has to be protected by circuit breaker accordant to the load connected to device
!
DIM-6 in installation is cooled by natural air fl ow. If the natural air fl ow access is reduced, cooling has to be provided by ventilator. Rated operating temperature is 35°C/ 95 °F
!
If there are several DIM6-3M-P connected to DIM-6, the distance between them has to be min. 2 cm/ 0.8”
!
Max. lenght of bus EB is 1 m/ 39.4” and the connection has to be realized by schielded cable
Device description DIM6-3M-P
max. 1 000VA
2.5 % from load Terminal for additional modul conductor bar
2 x MOSFET
5 A
1 000 VA*
1 000 VA*
1 000 VA*
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) vertical
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel operating control device additional control device
1.B.E
FR-0 class 2
2.5 kV
III.
2 max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 /with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
134 g (4.7 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014
Phase connection term
EB1 EB2 EB3 EB4 EB5
L L L V V
V
Output terminals
*Warning: it is not allowed to connect loads of inductive and capacitive character at the same time
CIB+
CIB -
0(1)-10V
50k
L
N
F max.15A*
2
2
2
2
R, L, C
*Potencial L on device terminal, has to be protected by circuit breaker accordant to the load connected to device.
41
Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fl uorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Designated for dimming of: a) LED bulbs and LED light sources
b) dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps
Enables gradual setting of luminance by push-button (non-detent) or parallel buttons
Returns to last state upon re-energization
Type of light source (LED or saving fl uorescent lamp) is set by switch-over on the front panel of device
Minimal luminance, set by potentiometer on the front panel, eliminates fl ashing of some types of saving fl uorescent lamps
DIM-15
Supply voltage 230V AC
Output status is indicated by red LED:
- shines when output is active
-fl ashes while heating overload, at the same time output is disconnected
1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, saddle terminals
SMR-M
!
!
button-controlled dimmer intended to be installed in an installation box (e.g. KU-68) into the existing electrical wiring protection against excessive temperature inside the device - switches off the output
DIM-15
EAN code
DIM-15/230V: 8595188140690
SMR-M: 8595188143776
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Operating range:
Apparent power:
Loss power:
Dissipated power:
Supply indication:
Control
Control terminals:
Control wire:
Control voltage:
Control input power:
Control impulse lenght:
Glow tubes connection:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Output
Contactless:
Load:*
Output status indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Terminal wire capacity:
Connection:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
SMR-M
DIM-15 SMR-M
A1-A2 x
x 4-wire, with neutral
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
-15 %; +10 % max. 1.5VA
max. 0.7W
green LED
Symbol
DIM-15
(SMR-M)
A1 (L)
T(S) A2(N)
V
Light source type setting
dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps LED bulbs
A1 - T x
x L - S
AC 230 V
AC 0.3-0.6 VA min. 80 ms / unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 15 pcs 230V - max. amount 10 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
DIM-15
L
A1 V
L
N
SMR-M
T 2.5 A recomended fuse
2 x MOSFET
300 W (at cos φ =1) 160 W (at cos φ =1)
red LED x
T 1.6 A recomended fuse
V L N S
A2 T
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any
DIN rail EN 60715 free at connecting wires
IP 40 from front panel / IP30 in standard
IP 10 clips conditions
III.
2
max. 2x2.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5,
max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12) x
solid w. CY, Ø 0.75 mm 2 (AWG 18),
x lenght 90mm (3.5˝)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝)
57 g (1.98 oz.) 38 g (1.3 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
N
Functions and controlling
Supplying Un
V min
V min
T max max
>0.5s
<0.5s
Controlling:
!
short button press (<0.5s)
turns the light off or on
!
long press (>0.5s) enables
slight regulation of light intensity
!
setting of minimal luminance
is possible only during
decreasing of luminance by long
button press
Minimal luminance setting:
„LED bulb“ :
!
if the light is turned off, short press (<0.5s) switches the light onto last set luminance level
* Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ.
The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4.
An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source.
„Energy saving lamp“ :
!
when light is off, short impulse turns lamp on and then luminance is decreased to set level
!
setting of minimal luminance by saving fluorescent lamps serves for harmonizing of lowest light
intensity prior its unprompted switching off
42
Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fl uorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M
Device describtion
Supply voltage L
Supply voltage indication
Light source type selection
A1 V
DIM - 15
Output
Output indication
Minimal luminance setting
Supply voltage N
A2 T
Controlling input
Minimal luminance setting
Supply voltage indication
Switch (button)
Neutral
Connection example
N
L
Light source type selection
Output to an appliance
Phase
Additional information
!
it is possible to dim only LED bulbs equipped with capacitator supplying
!
it is not possible to dim saving fl uorescent lamps without marking: dimmable
!
an incorrect setting of light source has eff ect only on dimming range, it means neither dimmer or
load get demaged
!
maximal load is counting with usage of LC fi lter
!
actual list of tested light sources is constantly refreshing, further information on www.elkoep.com/products/
43
Controlled dimmer SMR-S, SMR-U
!
Button-controlled dimmers designated for fl ush mounting into a wiring box, into an existing electroinstallation
!
(SMR-S doesn´t need neutral for correct function)
Used to control lamp brightness, dimming, possible to control from more places (parallel connections)
!
!
Protection against temperature overrun inside the device – output off
By changing wall-switch for a switch with SMR-S/SMR-U installed below you can reach eff ective brightness control
!
!
!
SMR-S enables dimming of electric bulbs 12 V, halogen lights with wound transformers (inductive load)
SMR-U enables also dimming 12 V halogen lights with electronic transformers (capacitive load)
It can not be used for dimming of fl uorescent lamps and energy saving lamps
EAN code
SMR-S /230V: 8595188123518
SMR-U /230V: 8595188130738
Technical parameters
SMR-S
!
SMR-S - 3-wire connection, functional without neutral
- max. load: 300 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with wound transformer)
- contactless output -1x triac
- with exchangeable fuse
!
SMR-U - 4-wire connection
- max. load: 500 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with electronic or wound transformer)
- contactless output - 2 xMOSFET
- electronic over-heating protection - output off in case of short-circuit or overload
SMR-U
Connection SMR-S, SMR-U
Connection:
Voltage range:
Power input (no operation/make):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Output
Resistive load:
Inductive load:
Capacitive load:
Control
Control voltage:
Current:
Impulse lenght:
Glow tubes connection:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Fuse:
Connection:
Glow lamps in a button:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
3-wire con., without neutral 4-wire con., with neutral
10 - 300 VA
10 - 150 VA x
230 V AC / 50Hz max. 3 VA
-15 %; +10 %
0 °C to +50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F) any free at connecting wires
IP 30 in standard conditions
III.
2
F 1.6A / 250V x solid wires 0.75 mm 2 (AWG 18), lenght: 90 mm (3.5” ) max. number 10
49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9” x 1.9” x 0.5”)
32 g (1.1 oz.) 32 g (1.1 oz.)
EN 61010-1, EN 60669-2-1
500 VA*
500 VA*
500 VA*
AC 230 V max. 3 mA min. 50 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs 230V - max. amount 10 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
Note:
* - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure suffi cient cooling.
N
L
V L S
SMR-S
Typical connection of SMR-S
- dimmer of lights
R, L
S N
Typical connection of SMR-U
- dimmer of lights
Warning: it cannot be used for fl uorescent lights and energy saving lights!
V
L
SMR-
U
R, L, C
SMR-U: It is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the same time.
Function SMR-S, SMR-U
Supply
Output
Brightness
Description of SMR-S
Indication Exchangeable fuse Controlling contact
<0.5s <0.5s
>0.5s
>0.5s
<0.5s
Short press (<0.5s) turns a light on, another short press turns it off . A longer press (>0.5s) causes a gradual regulation of light intensity min-max-min round until the button is released. After releasing a set intensity is kept in memory, further short presses turn the light on/off keeping the set intensity.
The intensity can be changed by further long press. After de-energising the relay remembers the set value.
Button control input
Output
Phase
44
Lighting intensity controller LIC-1
EAN code
LIC-1 8595188144933
SKS photosensor: 8594030337288
Technical parameters
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply voltage:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Apparent/loss power input:
Power supply indication:
Control
Button - control terminals:
Control voltage:
Control input power:
Duration of control pulse:
Glow tubes connection (terminals L-T):
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Blocking input - terminals:
Control voltage:
Input power:
Glow tubes connection (terminals L-B):
Duration of control pulse:
Output:
Output status indication:
Load capacity:*
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Ingress protection:
Overvoltage category:
Contamination degree:
Connecting conductor cross-section (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Mounting of SKS photosensor on the wall
Mounting of SKS photosensor into the panel
!
Automatically regulates the intensity of light in a room
!
External sensor scans the intensity and based on the preset value it decreases or increases the brightness of light
!
Designed for dimming the LED lights, ESL - dimmable energy saving lamps, R - inductive, L - resistive and C - capacitive load
!
Operating status:
1 - Off
2 - Automatic regulation
3 - Cleaning (maximum level of illumination)
4 - Setting the minimum lighting brightness
5 -Setting the desired level of illumination
!
Optional connection of buttons with 50 neon lamps
!
Blocking the automatic control via external signal, power supply 230V AC
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamping terminals
LIC-1 Connection Symbol
L-N
AC 230 V / 50-60 Hz
±15 % max. 1.6VA / 0.8W
green LED
L - T
AC 230 V max. 0.6 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
L - B
AC 230V max. 0.1VA
No min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
2x MOSFET red LED
300 W (at cos φ =1)
L
N
Description
Supply voltage L
L V
B
Blocking input
Supply voltage indication
Selection of light source type
IN IN
N T
Sensor SKS
L V
B
T 2.5 A recomended front-end protection glow-lamp
IN
IN
B L
T N
V
Output
Output indication
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
57 g (1.98 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
IN IN
Lighting-up speed setting*
Dimming speed setting*
Terminals for the connection of the SKS sensor
* Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ.
The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4.
An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source.
Supply voltage N
N T
Control input
*by automatic regulation
Function
Control (external button):
!
Pressing the button shortly (<0.5 s ) - always switches the light off
!
Medium-long press (0.5 - 3s) - automatic control
!
Long press (> 3s) - cleaning
!
3 x short presses from "off" - setting the desired level of illumination
!
5 x short presses from „off“ - setting the minimum brightness
In mode 4 and 5, the lamp brightness changes periodically from minimum to maximum. At a required level of brightness, the value is stored into memory by pressing the button shortly.
Selection of light source type
energy saving lights halogen lamp with electronic transformer
LED lamp, 230 V 230 V bulb halogen lamp with ferromagnetic transformer
45
Voltage
12V
Power supplies
Stabilized
DC- switching
PSB-10-12
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 12V stabil
LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
-MINI, into an installation box (such as KU-68).
PS-10-12
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W
- galvanically separated
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 1 MODULE.
PS-30-12
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 2.5A / 30 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 3 MODULE.
DR-60-12
IN: AC 100-240 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 4.5A / 54 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- range of incoming voltage
- 4.5 MODULE .
PS-100-12
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 8,4A / 100 W
- galvanically separated
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 6 MODULE.
Stabilized
DC- linear
Nonstabilized
AC+DC
ZNP-10-12V
IN: AC 230V
OUT: AC/DC 12V nostabil
LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA
- galvanically separated
- fuse
- 3 MODULE.
24V
PSB-10-24
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 0.42A / 10W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
-MINI, into an installation box (such as KU-68).
PS-10-24
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 0.42A / 10W
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 1 MODULE.
PS-30-24
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 1.25A / 30W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 3 MODULE.
DR-60-24
IN: AC 100-240 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 2.5A / 60W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- 4.5 MODULE .
PS-100-24
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 4,2A / 100 W
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 6 MODULE.
ZNP-10-24V
IN: AC 230V
OUT: AC/DC 24V nostabil
LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA
- galvanically separated
- fuse
- 3 MODULE.
Regulated
PS-30-R
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12-24 V regul., stab.
LOAD: 2.5-1.25A / 30W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 3 MODULE.
ZSR-30
IN: AC 230V
OUT: DC 5-24 V reg., stab.
OUT: AC 24V, DC24V
LOAD: 1.6-0.3A/10VA
- range of incoming voltage
-current restrictor
- electronic fuse
- 3 MODULE.
Nonstabilized AC
Bell transformer
ZTR-8-8
output voltage 8 V.
Power: 8W.
ZTR-8
-
12
output voltage12 V.
Power: 8W.
ZTR-15-12
output voltage 4-8-12 V.
Power: 4V5V - 8V 10V- 12V 15V.
46
Power supplies
Output
Protection against overload
ZNP-10-12
ZNP-10-24
ZSR-30
PSB-10-12
3M-DIN
3M-DIN
3M-DIN
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
#
#
#
MINI-BOX AC 100-250V
#
#
# #
AC 12V
DC 12 V
AC 24V
DC 24V
DC 5-24V
AC 24 V
0.8 A
0.4 A
1.6 A- 0.3 A
#
#
DC 12 V
0.84 A
PSB-10-24
PS-10-12
PS-10-24
PS-30-12
PS-30-24
PS-30-R
PS-100-12
PS-100-24
DR-60-12
DR-60-24
ZTR-8-8
ZTR-8-12
ZTR-15-12
MINI-BOX AC 100-250V
# #
DC 24V
0.42 A
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
3M-DIN
3M-DIN
3M-DIN
6M-DIN
6M-DIN
4.5M-DIN
4.5M-DIN
2M-DIN
2M-DIN
3M-DIN
AC 230 V,
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
-20/+10%
AC 100-240V
DC 124-370 V
AC 100-240V
DC 124-370 V
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
+/- 10%
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
DC 12 V
DC 24V
DC 12 V
DC 24V
DC 12 V
DC 24V
DC 12 V
DC 24V
8 V
12 V
4-8-12 V
0.84 A
0.42 A
2.5 A
1.25 A
#
DC 12-24 V
2.5 A-1.25 A
8.4A
4.2 A
4.5 A
2.5 A
1A
0.66A
2-1.5-1A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
-
-
-
-
-
S
S
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
DC and AC nonstabilized, output voltage 12 V – where it is not required or where there is stabilized diff erently/later
DC and AC nonstabilized output voltage 24 V – where it is not required or is stabilized later regulated output voltage in a wide range DC 5-24 V: possibility to adjust output voltage with load according to request stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 10 W, box
51
51
51
48-49 stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V / 10 W, box
48-49 stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 10 W,
1 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V / 10 W,
1 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 30 W,
3 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V / 30 W,
3 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12-24 V / 30 W,
3 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 100 W,
6 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24V / 100W,
6 module
48-49
48-49
48-49
48-49
48-49
48-49
48-49 effi cient switching power supply of DC voltage 12V / 54 W, wide range of input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V) effi cient switching power supply of DC voltage 24V / 60 W, wide range of input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V)
50
50
#
52
# bell transformer (short-circuit-proof) for supplying of bells, door openers, home call-boxes
#
52
52
47
Power supplies PS
PS-10-24
EAN code
PSB-10-12
PSB-10-24
8595188145022
8595188143783
PSB-10-24
PS-30-12V
PS-30-24V
PS-30-R
PS-100-12V
PS-100-24V
8595188137966
8595188139045
8595188136655
8595188137195
8595188139021
PS-10-12V
PS-10-24V
8595188139052
8595188139069
Technical parameters:
Input
Voltage range:
Burden without load (max):
Burden with full load (max):
Protection:
Output
Output voltage DC / max. current:
PSB-10-12 PSB-10-24
AC 110 - 250V / 50-60Hz
3VA / 0.5W
26VA / 13W x
PS-10-12 PS-10-24
AC 184 - 253V/50-60Hz
5VA / 2W
25VA / 13W fuse T1A
12V/0.84A 24V/0.42A
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
PSB-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fi xed output voltage, for mounting into an installation box (such as KU-68)
PSB-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12V/10W
PSB-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24V/10W
PS-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fi xed output voltage, version 1-module
PS-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/10 W
PS-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/10 W
PS-30: switching stabilized power supplies, version 3-module
PS-30-12 - stabilized power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V/30 W
PS-30-24 - stabilized power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V/30 W
PS-30-R – stabilized regulated power supply 12-24 V/30 W
PS-100: stabilized power supply with fi xed output voltage, version 6-module
PS-100-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/100 W
PS-100-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/100 W
Output current is limited by electronic fuse, in case maximal current is exceeded, the device switches off and after a shot time interval it again switches on.
Indication of output voltage by green LED on front panel (except PSB-10)
Temperature protection – if temperature is exceeded, the device switches off and after cooled down, it switches on again
12.2V/0.84A 24.2V/0.42A
PS-30-12
PS-30-24 PS-30-R
AC 100-250V / 50 - 60Hz
9VA / 1W 10VA/1,5W
70VA / 37W
fuse T2A
4VA / 1,7W
70VA / 37W
PS-100-12 PS-100-24
AC 184-253V/50-60Hz
6VA / 2W
195VA / 118W fuse T 3.15A
12.2V/2.5A
24.2V/1.25A
12.2V/8.4A
24.2V/4.2A
Tolerance of output voltage:
Output indication:
Wave of off -load output voltage:
12.2V/2.5A 24.2V/1.25A
± 2% green LED
40mV
80mV
30mV
40mV 55mV
Wave of output voltage with max load:
Time delay after connection:
Time delay after over-load
Overload capacity:
Effi ciency:
Electronic fuse:
Other information
Working humidity:
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength input- output:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Polutioon degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Outlets:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
380mV
> 75%
IP30 x solid wire CY, Ø 4x0.75mm
2
, 90mm
48 x 48 x 21 mm
70 g 70 g
20mV
> 75%
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm
62 g 62 g
80mV max. 1s
500mV max. 1s
max. 120% of rated output
>82% electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage
>81%
20 .. 90% RH
-20 °C to +40 °C (-4 °F to 104°F)
-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F)
4kV
IP40 device/ IP20 in-built in distribution board
II.
1
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5
x
90 x 52 x 65 mm
158 g 158 g
EN 61558-1, EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-17
90 x 52 x 65 mm
158 g
5mV
>82%
90 x 105 x 65 mm
375 g 363 g
Connection
PSB-10-12
(PSB-10-24)
AC 110-250 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N L
PS-10-12
(PS-10-24)
AC 184-253 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N L
PS-30-12
(PS-30-24)
AC 100 - 250 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N L
PS-30-R AC 100 - 250 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N L
PS-100-12
(PS-100-24)
AC 184-253 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N L
AC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V / 0.84A
(DC 24 V / 0.42A)
AC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V / 0.84A
(DC 24 V / 0.42A)
T 1A
AC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V / 2.5A
(DC 24 V / 1.25A)
T 2A
AC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V - 24 V /
2.5 -1.25A
T 2A
AC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V / 8.4A
(DC 24 V / 4.2A)
T 3.15A
48
Power supplies PS
Connection
NOVINKA
PSB-10-12 / PSB-10-24 designated for installation into an installation box. Suitable for controlling of lighting sources, thermo valves, shutter engines, etc.
PSB-10-12
Output voltage
Output voltage
PS-10-12
Supply terminals
Output voltage indication
N L
PS-30-12
Supply terminals
Output voltage indication
N L
Neutral
Phase
Output voltage terminals
+ -
Output voltage terminals Output voltage terminals
+ + + \ - - -
Output voltage terminals
PS-100-12
Supply terminals
N L
- - - - -
PS-30-R
Output voltage terminals Supply terminals
Output voltage indication
Indication of over-load
Setting output voltage
N L
Output voltage terminals
+ + + + + +
- - - - - -
Output voltage terminals
Output voltage terminals
+ + + \ - - -
Output voltage terminals
49
Power supplies DR
!
Stabilized switching power supply
!
Input voltage (Uprim) in a wide range 100 - 240 V AC
!
DR-60-12: power supply with fi xed output voltage DC 12 V, stabilized 54 W
!
DR-60-24: power supply with fi xed output voltage DC 24 V, stabilized 60 W
!
Max. load 12 V-4.5 A, 24 V-2.5 A
!
Electronic protection of short-circuit, over-loading, over-voltage, fi ne setting of output voltage by trimmer
in a range ±10%
!
LED power indicator light, viewable from the front panel
!
Ambient air cooled through the perforated housing
!
4.5-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, isulation class II
EAN code
DR-60-12V: 8595188125048
DR-60-24V: 8595188125055
Technical parameters:
Input (U prim)
Voltage range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Consumption without load (max):
Consumption with full load (max):
Output (Usec)
Output voltage:
Max.load:
Output voltage-no load DC:
Wave of output voltage:
Effi ciency:
Tolerance of output voltage:
Electronic fuse:
Fine adjustment of output voltage:
Overloud protection:
Time delay after connection:
Other information
Working humidity:
Thermal coefi cient:
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength (prim/sec):
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description
Terminal supply voltage Uprim
88-264 V AC/ 47-63 Hz nebo 124-370 V DC in the range of supply voltage
3VA
AC 65 VA AC 70 VA
12V ±10% 24V ±10%
4.5A / 54W 2.5A / 60W
12V ±10% 24V ±10%
0.12V 0.15V
83.5% 86%
±1 % electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage
±10 % - trimrem to 105-160 % of rated output
100 ms for 100% loading and AC 230 V
20 - 90 % RH
0.03 % /°C (0 to 50 °C)/ 0.03 % /°F (32 °F to 122 °F)
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F) / (10 - 95% RH )
3 kV
IP20 device/ IP40 in-built in distribution board solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 10)
78 x 93x 56 mm (3.1˝ x 3.7˝ x 2.2˝)
300 g (10.6 oz.)
EN 61010-1, EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-17
Input voltage terminals U DC
Symbol
Connection
DR-60-12
DR-60-24
N
L
AC
DC
+ -
Uprim supply voltage
AC 100-240 V
DC 124-270 V
U DC
Output voltage
DC 12 V/4.5 A
DC 24 V/ 2.5 A
N L + + trimmer for fi ne setting of output voltage
±10%
+ +
Trimmer for fi ne setting
of output voltage ±10%
50
Power supply ZSR-30, ZNP-10
Regulated stabilized power supply ZSR-30
!
Supply of various devices and appliances by safe voltage with fully galvanic separation from the main.
!
Input voltage: AC 230 V
!
Output voltage: DC 5-24 V stab., DC 24 V unstab. and AC 24 V
!
Exceeded current limit values is indicated by LED fl ashing
!
When there is full short-circuit, output is disconnected, output current is limited by an electronic fuse
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
ZNP-10-12V: 8594030332733
ZNP-10- 24V: 8594030334089
ZSR-30: 8594030331750
Technical parameters
Entry (U prim)
Voltage range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Consumption without load (max):
Consumption with load (max):
Output (Usec)
Output voltage:
Output voltage-no load AC:
Output voltage-no load DC:
Fuse:
Wave of output voltage:
Effi ciency:
Tolerance of output voltage:
Electronic fuse:
Other information:
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght (prim/sec):
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
ZSR-30
6 VA
Nonstabilized power supply ZNP-10-12V, ZNP-10-24V
!
AC and DC output voltage: 12 V or 24 V, nonstabilized
!
Power supply with fi xed output voltage
!
Protection against short-circuit and overload by a safety fuse
!
Input voltage: AC 230 V
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
ZNP-10-12V
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
7 VA
ZNP-10-24V
6.5 VA
DC 5-24 V stab.
DC 24 V nonstab.
AC 24 V
32 V
44 V
300 mV
75 %
±5 %
Towards black-out and and current overloading
DC 12 V nonstab.
AC 12 V
17 V
22 V primary wind T100 mA max.4 V
x
x
x
DC 24 V nonstab.
AC 24 V
32 V
44 V max.3 V
-20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F)
-20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
4 kV
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
390 g (13.8 oz.) 360 g (13.8 oz.) 360 g (13.8 oz.)
EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-1. EN 61558-1
Connection
ZSR -30
ZNP-10
PRI
АС 230 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
T100 mA/250 V
SEC
AC AC
+
DC
DC
DC
REG
-
+
-
REG
-
PRI
АС 230 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
T100 mA/250 V
SEC
AC
DC
DC
-
+
-
DC
WARNING! Values of max. load are valid for (operational) temperature.
Total loads on all output terminals may not exceed this values: by supplying 230 V-253 V – 8W from 230 V…207 V output power is proportionately decreesing onto 5 W
Description
ZSR-30
Input voltage terminals
ZNP-10-12V
ZNP-10-24V
Input voltage terminals
Output voltage
indication
AC output voltage
DC nonstabilized output voltage
AC output voltage
DC output regulated voltage
DC unregulated output voltage
51
Bell transformers ZTR
!
Designated for general use – e.g. as home bells supply, door locks supply
!
Input voltage: AC 230 V
!
Short-circuit-proof, doubled output terminals
!
2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
ZTR-8-8: output voltage 8 V
ZTR-8-12: output voltage 12 V
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
ZTR-15-12: output voltage 4 - 8 -12V
EAN code
ZTR-8-8V : 8595188136808
ZTR-8-12V: 8595188136815
ZTR-15-12V: 8595188139281
Technical parameters
Entry (U prim)
Voltage range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Consumption without load (max):
Output (Usec)
Output voltage:
Output voltage-no load AC:
Max.loability:
Fuse:
Other information:
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght (prim/sec):
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
ZTR-8-8 ZTR-8-12 ZTR-15-12
-15 %; +10 %
7.2 VA
AC 8 V
12 V
8 VA
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
9.4 VA
AC 12 V
16 V
8 VA
short-circ.resistant
± 10 %
3.5 VA
AC 4 V
AC 8 V
AC 12 V
16 V
4V 5VA - 8V 10VA - 12 V 15VA
-20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F)
-20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
3.75 kV
IP20/40 solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
314 g (11.1 oz.)
312 g (11 oz.)
350 g (12.3 oz.)
EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-8, EN 61558-2-1
Connection
ZTR-8-8
3
8V
4
1
230V ~ 50 Hz
N L 2
ZTR-8-12
3
12V
4
1
230V ~ 50 Hz
N L 2
ZTR-15-12
52
Twilight switches
SOU
Accessories of twilight switches:
SOU-1
Twilight switch.
Voltage range:
AC 230 V a AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
Photosensor SKS
Protection degree: IP56.
It is suitable for mounting on the wall or in panel.
SOU-2
Twilight switch with digital time clock.
Voltage range:
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
Output conatct:
1x changeover /SPDT 8 A.
Memory relays
MR
MR-41
Voltage range:
AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
Control and signalling devices
MR-42
Voltage range:
AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V
Output contact:
2x changeover / SPDT 16 A.
USS
USS
designated for switching, controlling and signalling by auxiliary any power circuits.
SWITCHES,
PUSH BUTTONS
SWITCHES
WITH GLOW LAMP
SIGNALLING LIGHT
BLIND FLANGE
62x34x98
IP65
SOU-3
Twilight and light switch
Voltage range:
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
Output conatct:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
53
Twilight switch SOU-1
EAN codes:
SOU-1 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188121002
SOU-1 /UNI + photosensor SKS: 8595188121019
Photosensor SKS: 8594030337288
Technical parameters
Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall
!
It serves to control lights on the basis of ambient light intensity
!
Used for switching street illumination and garden lights, illumination of advertisements, shop windows, etc.
!
Level of ambient intensity is monitored by an external sensor and output is switched according to set level on the device
!
Control input for additional control, e.g. time switch, preswitch etc.
!
Level of illumination adjustable in two ranges: 1 - 100 Lx and 100 - 50000 Lx
!
Adjustable time delay to eliminate short term fl uctuation in illumination
!
External sensor IP56 suitable for mounting on the wall (cover and holder of a sensor are a part of the package)
!
Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A
!
Mounting of photosensor SKS into the panel
!
Red LED output indication
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
SOU-1
Symbol Connection
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Power input (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time delay:
Time delay setting:
Illumination rang 1):
Illumination rang 2):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Power the control input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Sensor cable length:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions of the sensor:
Weight of sensor:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
0 - 2 min potentiometer
1 - 100 Lx
100 - 50000 Lx
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO
2
)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
0.8 - 530 mVA (UNI), 0.8 - 530 mVA (AC 230 V)
Yes(UNI, AC 230 V)
A1-S
AC 230 V - Yes / UNI - No
230 V - max. amount 20 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals max. 50 m (standard wire)
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 10) see page 133
20 g (0.7 oz.)
90x17.6x64 mm
(UNI) - 75 g (2.6 oz.), (230) - 65 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
IN
IN
A1
S A2
Description of DIP switch
DIP 1 - LUX
ON
100 - 50000 Lx
1 - 100 Lx
DIP 2 - TEST
ON
ТЕSТ ON
NORMAL
Description
Supply voltage indication
Setting of level of illumination
Fine setting of level of
illumination
Setting time delay
16 18
15
L
N
Function
A1 S A2
IN IN ambient light intensity
LEVEL
A1-A2
ТЕSТ
S
15-18
15 16 18
A1 S A2
IN IN
15 16 18
Lx
Hysteresis
t tt
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for sensor
Terminal of blocking input
Output indication
Switch of test function TEST
Output contact
54
Twilight switch SOU-2 with digital time switch clock
innovation!
A1 A2 T1 T1
15 16 18
Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall
!
It serves for control of lights on the basis of ambient light intensity and real time (combination of SOU-1 and time switch clock SHT-1 in one device)
!
Time clock can override the light sensor for applications when lights are not required
!
Adjustable light intensity 1-50000 lx
!
Function „random switching“ enables simulation of presence in a house when nobody is at home
!
Switching: according to a program (AUTO) / permanently manual / random (CUBE)
!
External sensor IP56 issuitable for mounting on the wall/ in panel ( cover and sensors are part of delivery)
!
easy replacement of backup battery with plug-in module located on front panelof device (no disassembly required)
EAN code
SOU-2 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188130523 photosensor SKS: 8594030337288
SOU-2 : 85957888121644
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Back-up supply:
Typ záložní baterie:
Summer/winter time:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Minimum interval:
Data stored for:
Program circuit
Illumination range:
Program place number:
Program period:
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Dimensions of the sensor:
Weight:
Weight sensor:
Standards:
!
2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Mounting of photosensor SKS into the panel
SOU-2
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz max. 4 VA
-15 %; +10 % yes
CR 2032 (3V) automatic
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO
2
)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 30 V DC
1x10 7
1x10 5
3 years max. ±1 s day (23 °C/ 73.4 °F )
1 min min. 10 years
1-50000 Lx
100 daily, weekly
LCD display, illuminated by back up
-10 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 1.4˝ x 2.5˝) see page 119
110 g (3.9 oz.)
20 g (0.7 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1, EN 60255-6
Symbol
T1
T1
Description of visual elements on the display
Displaying the day
Status indication
Display of date / the lighting setup menu
Time display
Control button PRG / +
Reset
Control button MAN1 / -
Description
A1
A2
16 18
SOU-2
Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2)
Backlight display
15
Auto + t
Connection
Prog
A1 A2 T1 T1
Auto
external sensor
Man
SOU-2
RESET
PRG +
MAN
_
ESC
OK
Un
A1 A2 T1 T1
15 16 18
Operation mode indication
Displays 12/24 hour mode
Indication of the switching program
Control button ESC
Control button OK
Sensor-Terminal
Controlling buttons
Lead-sealing point
Plug-in module:
15 16 18
Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery
Output - Channel 1(15-16-18) with battery backup without battery backup
55
Twilight switch SOU-3
98x62x34
IP65
EAN code
SOU-3 /230V: 8595188140560
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Input (apparent/loss):
Setting the scale level of lighting:
Function (twilight switch)
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Function (light switch)
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Setting function
Level of light-slight:
Slight setting of light level:
Time delay t:
Delay setting t:
Output
Output contact:
Current rating:
Switching output:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information:
Operation temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Suggested power-supply cable:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
Actual illumination level
Setup
illumination level
L - N
Function
twilight switch
15 - 18
Function
light switch
15 - 18
t
!
It serves as control of the device on the basis of ambient light intensity
!
External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall, front cover removable without screws
!
Built in high resolution light sensor
!
Two devices in one, function is set by jumper:
- twilight switch – contact closes by decreasing of ambient light intensity, and opens by its increasing
- light switch – contact closes by increasing ambient light intensity, and opens by decreasing light intensity. Used for switching of devices by reaching of pre-set ambient light level, usually sun shine(pulling down the shutters or blinds, activation of solar panels) adjustable (by jumper) ranges of light level
!
3 adjustable levels of time delay (for elimination of short-term fl uctuations of light intensity – for short increases in light intensity)
!
Supply voltage 230 V AC
!
Potential-free output contact 12A/AC1 switching
SOU-3
L - N
AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz
- 15% .. +10% max 6VA / 0.7W
by jumper J2
1 ... 10 Lx
10 ... 100 Lx
100 ... 1.000 Lx
100 ... 1 000 Lx
1 000 ... 10 000 Lx
10 000 ... 100 000 Lx by jumper J3
0.1 ... 1 x range potenciometer
0 / 1 min. / 2 min.
by jumper J1
1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO
2
)
12 A / AC1
3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3 x 10 7
0.7 x 10
5
-30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV (supply-output) sensor-side down or on the sides
IP65
III.
2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)
98 x 62 x 34 mm (3.9˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝)
122 g ( 4.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, 61010-1
Description (proportion is accordant to real size)
Cable gommet M16x1.5
for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4”
Hole for mounting on the wall Ø4.3mm/ 0.2”
Connection
L
N jumper for L potential
SOU-3
L
15
L
N
0
1
2
J1
Delay
(min)
18
J2
Adjustable range
setting (Lx)
10
100
1.000
1.000
10.000
100.000
J3
Function
light switch
twilight switch
Slight setup fi nish in the frame of range
N
L potentialless
NO contacts
L
15
18
L
N
L
15
18
Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2”
Sensor of ambient light
L
N
t t t t
Solid hysteresis 12%
3- wiring connection
Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection).
For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting.
4- wiring connection
56
Memory & latching relays MR-41, MR-42
EAN code
MR-41 /230V
MR-41 /UNI
MR-42 /230V
MR-42 /UNI
8595188115889
8595188115896
8595188115902
8595188115919
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Consumption of input:
Load between A2-ON/OFF:
Control. terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Latching relays, controlled by buttons from several locations can replace three way switches or cross bar switches thanks to control by buttons (unlimited number, connected in parallel by 2 wires), installation gets more transparent and faster for mounting
!
Relay MR-41/UNI, MR-42/UNI memorize its last state even after supply failure. During the failure relay will turn off and after re-energizing will automatically turns on.
!
MR-41
- output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A
!
MR-42
- options - 2x parallel contacts or the other relay is latching
- function selected via external jumper between B1 - B2
- output contact: 2x changeover /SPDT 16 A
!
Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V
!
1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, controlling by buttons
MR-41 MR-42
1 2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.17 - 3 VA / DC 0.1 - 1.2 W AC 0.17 - 12 VA / DC 0.11 - 1.9 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.2 W AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W
-15 %; +10 % green LED
1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO
2
) 2x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO
2
)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V)
Yes
A1 - ON/OFF
Yes
230V - max. amount 5 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
(UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g (UNI) - 89 g, (230) - 85 g
EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
Symbol
MR-41
ON/OFF A2
Connection
MR-41
L
N
Function
MR-41
A1
+ -
11 12 14
12 14
A1 - A2
ON/OFF
11 - 14
MR-42
A1 - A2
ON/OFF
B1 B2
11 - 14
21 - 24
B1 B2
11 - 14
21 - 24
MR-42
A1
11
ON/OFF A2
L
N
MR-42
+ -
B1 B2
21 22 24
11 12 14
12 14 22 24
11 21
57
Controlling and signalling modul es USS
!
Independent switch units designed for fl exible controlling and switching of power circuits
!
USS - “Do It Yourself” = it is possible to “click into” diff erent types of switches and signalling units into the basic module
!
Units are delivered as components and confi gured by the user
!
15 types of units: switches, push buttons, signal lights of diff erent colours including fl ashing lights units are replaceable also for future (for example when an application is changed, extended, etc...)
!
It is possible to place up to two units into one MODULE (for example 2x switch,
2x signalling lights or combinations) = saves space in switchboard panels
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
Operating temperature
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
!
M3 screw with clamp terminals
EAN code
USS-ZM
USS-00
USS-01
USS-02
USS-03
USS-04
USS-05
USS-06/S
USS-06/R
USS-07
USS-08
USS-09
USS-10
USS-11
USS-12
USS-13
USS-14
USS-15
8595188124577
8595188124614
8595188124621
8595188124638
8595188124645
8595188124652
8595188124669
8595188124676
8595188136372
8595188124683
8595188124690
8595188124706
8595188124331
8595188124348
8595188124355
8595188124362
8595188124898
8595188124379
Units
CONNECTION INDICATION
USS-ZM MODUL
RATED CURRENT/VOLTAGE
FOR SWITCHES SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FOR SIGNALLING
LIGHTS
DESCRIPTION
Basic MODULE (housing with terminals and contacts)
USS-00
Blind fl ange
Make your own device USS - easy and intelligent solution!
BLIND FLANGE
Used to fi ll in an empty position in the front panel of the USS Module
Color: Grey, RAL7035 (the same as the housing).
Unit: 00
Example of an order:
USS - ZM
+ USS - 07
+ USS - 11
A3 A1
A2
USS-01 A3
(A13)
USS-02 A3
(A13)
A1
(A12)
6A / 250 V AC
8 A / 250 V AC
Switch
Alternation switch
SWITCHES, PUSH BUTTONS
They have a low uplift and a large fi ngerboard. High quality contacts, easy rock switch and large button area provide years of useful life.
Unit: 01-06
USS-03
A3
(A13)
USS-04
A3
(A13)
USS-05
A3
(A13)
USS-06/S A3
(A13)
USS-06/R
A3
(A13)
USS-07
A3
(A13)
USS-08
A3
(A13)
USS-09
A3
(A13)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A1
(A12)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
6 A / 250 V AC
6 A / 250 V AC
6 A / 250 V AC
8 A / 250 V AC
8 A / 250 V AC
Switch with cental position
Switch + button with central position
Switching button with central position
NO switch
NC switch
10 A / 250 V AC
Switch with glow lamp (red)
10 A / 250 V AC
Switch with glow lamp (green)
10 A / 250 V AC
Switch with glow lamp (yellow)
SWITCHES WITH GLOW LAMP
Switch and signalization in one unit.
Signalization is carried out by a glow lamp in dolly including series resistance. It is possible to instal it for permanent indication or for an intermittend by contact of the switch.
Colours: red, green, yellow.
Supply voltage of the signalling light:
AC 250 V.
SIGNALLING LIGHT
High luminescence SMD/LED that illuminates the entire button area surface.
Input voltage can be either AC 230 V or AC/
DC 24 V (output light may vary).
Red sig. light is delivered also in a fl ashing version.Unit: 14.
Colours: red, green, yellow, white, blue
Unit: 10-15
APEM
A 12
A 11 A 13
Terminal connection Laser marking
USS-10
A1
(A11)
USS-11
A1
(A11)
USS-12
A1
(A11)
USS-13
A1
(A11)
USS-14
A1
(A11)
USS-15
A1
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
Signalling LED (red)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
Signalling LED (green)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
Signalling LED (yellow)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
Signalling LED (white)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
Signalling LED fl ashing (red)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
Signalling LED (blue)
A3 A1
A2
A12
A11 A13
Dimensions
See page 117-121
4
8
8
4
U
L
Switches and buttons are marked by laser according to your request in case you order 50 pcs and more.
Max. number of symbols:
58
AC/DC
Monitoring relays
Current
A
Voltage
V
1 phase
HRN-33(HRN-63)
Supply and monitored voltage in range
AC 48-276 V, 1x output for Umax and
Umin adjustable level.
AC
HRN-35 as HRN-33 but individual output for each level ( Umax/Umin). Adjustable time delay to eliminate voltage peaks.
HRN-37 (HRN-67) as HRN-33(63), but in voltage range
AC 24-150 V.
HRN-41 (Hysteresis)
Monitoring DC and AC voltage
10-500 V, divided into 3 inputs and
3 ranges, 2 independent outputs 16 A,
2x time delay.
HRN-42 (Window) as HRN-41 but function WINDOW. Other functions (applicable for HRN-41): faulty state memory, hysteresis, galv. separated supply AC 230, 400, or AC/DC 24 V.
HRN-34(HRN-64) as HRN-33(63) but in voltage range
DC 6-30 V for monitoring battery circuits
( 6,12,24 V).
3 phase
AC
HRN-55 supply from all phases
HRN-55N supply L1-N (monitors also disconnection of neutral wire) Time delay to eliminate peaks.
HRN-57 supply from all phases
HRN-57N supply L1-N (monitos also neutral wire disconnection)
Adjustable voltage level.
PRI-32 monitoring by current transformer
(wire through an opening, galv. separated, without heat loss), adjust. current 1-20A, multivoltage
AC 24-240 and DC 24V, output 8A changeover.
HRN-54 supply from all phases
HRN-54N supply L1-N (monitors also disconection of neutral wire).All parameters adjustable by potentiometers.
HRN-56 adjustable level Umin
HRN-56/120
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
HRN-56/400
PRI-51 monitoring of current by in-built transformer,
5 ranges (in versions 1/2/5/8/16A), range
5A is suitable for current transformer
(X/5), supply and output as PRI-32, diff erence from PRI-32: direct monitoring and fi ner ranges (higher sensitivity) = higher accuracy in measuring.
HRN-56/480
HRN-56/575
PRI-52
For scanning the current up to 25 A. Long distance device diagnostics (black-out, increasement of take-off )
Priority relay
Supplying voltage AC 230 V
Output 8A/ SPST switching over
HRN-43
HRN-43N galvanically separated supply AC 230V,
AC 400 or AC/DC 24V, memory, adjustable hysteresis and delay,
2 x independent output.
MPS-1
Optical signaling of three-phase network.
PRI-53 for monitoring the current in three-phase devices. Power supply: 24-240 V AC/DC, galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current 2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A)
AC/ DC
PRI-41 (Hysteresis)
3 inputs (0,4-1,6, 1,25-5, 4-16A) divided into 3 ranges (selectable by a switch).
PRI-42 (Window) as PRI-41 but function “WINDOW”.
Level
HRH-5
Replacemat for HRH-2, simple version , 2 functions, galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 V AC/DC
HRH-1
4 functions, advanced setting for various combinations, galvanically separated supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V,
2 output contacts/2PDT 16A.
Power factor
cos-φ
Frequency
COS-1 monitors and scores power factor
(phase shift between current and voltage cos φ) in 3phase/1phase circuits (motors, pumps etc.).
HRF-10 for monitoring the frequency of AC voltage. The monitored frequency 50/60/400 Hz is selected by a switch.
HRH-6
Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes. Supply voltage: 12-24 V DC or galvanically separated 230 V AC.
HRH-6/S
Additional signalization to HRH-6 with 6 control lights on the front panel of device.
HRH-4 a set of level relay HRH-5 and a contactor VS425.
For automatic operation
1-phase and 3-phase pumps. 2 function. IP55.
Level switches accessories:
Level sensors SHR
SHR-1(M, N) - for monitoring fl ooding
SHR-2- for level detection
SHR-3 - for demanding and industrial environment
59
60
Monitoring relays review
Relay for current monitor Relays monitor voltage
Secure variables Nastavení
Type Description
HRN-33
HRN-34
HRN-35
HRN-37
HRN-63
HRN-64
HRN-67
HRN-41/230V
HRN-41/110V
HRN-41/400V
HRN-41/24V
HRN-42/230V
HRN-42/110V
HRN-42/400V
HRN-42/24V
HRN-43/230V
HRN-43/110V
HRN-43/400V
HRN-43/24V
HRN-43N/230V
HRN-43N/110V
HRN-43N/400V
HRN-43N/24V
HRN-55
HRN-55N
HRN-57
HRN-57N
HRN-54
3-M
1-M
1-M
1-M
1-M
1-M
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
AC 230V
AC-110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V from monitored from monitored from monitored from monitored from monitored
1-M
1-M
1-M
1-M
1-M
1-M
1-M
3-M
3-M from monitored from monitored from monitored
AC 230V
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V from monitored from monitored from monitored from monitored
AC 230V
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
AC 48 - 276 V
DC 6 - 30 V
AC 48 - 276 V
AC 24 - 150 V
AC 48 - 276 V
DC 6 - 30 V
AC 24 - 150 V
AC/DC
10 - 50 V
32 - 160 V
100 - 500 V
AC/DC
10 - 50 V
32 - 160 V
100 - 500 V
AC 3 x
84 - 480 V
AC 3 x 48 - 276 V
AC 3 x 300 - 500 V
3 AC 3 x 172 - 287 V
3
3
3
AC 3 x 300 - 500 V
AC 3 x 172 - 287 V
AC 3 x 300 - 500 V
HRN-54N
HRN-56/120
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
HRN-56/400
HRN-56/480
HRN-56/575
1-M from monitored
3 AC 3 x 172 - 287 V
1-M from monitored
3-M from monitored
3
3
AC 3 x 72 - 160 V
AC 3 x 125 - 276 V
AC 3 x 144 - 276 V
AC 3 x 240 - 460 V
AC 3 x 228 - 550 V
AC 3 x 345 - 660 V
For all types, the delay is adjustable from 0 - 10 seconds (to eliminate short-term outages or peaks)
The lower voltage level (Umin) is set in % of the upper level (Umax)
61
Second relay function (independent/parallel)
Galvanically separated power supply from measuring inputs
61
68
2 output relays, functions of the second relay may be selected (independent/parallel)
Galvanically separated power supply
68
Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails
Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption
64
64
Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails
65
Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption, replacement for HRN-52
65
If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will immediately disconnects with no delay
Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails
If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will immediately disconnects with no delay
Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption
66
66
67
Thanks to the power supply from all three phases, the relay is operational even if one phase fails
67
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
Signal relays
MPS-1
1-M from monitored
3 AC 3 x 50 - 253 V
Optical signaling of three-phase network
70
Type
PRI-32
PRI-41/230V
PRI-41/24V
PRI-42/230V
PRI-42/24V
PRI-51/0.5
PRI-51/1
PRI-51/2
PRI-51/5
PRI-51/8
PRI-51/16
PRI-52
PRI-53/1
PRI-53/5
1-M AC 24-240 V
DC 24 V
1
1 3-M AC 230 V
AC/DC 24 V
3-M AC 230 V
AC/DC 24 V
1
1-M AC 24-240 V
DC 24 V
1
1-M
6-M
AC 230 V
AC/DC
24-240 V
1
3
Level switches
Monitoring values
Type
HRH-1/230V
HRH-1/110V
HRH-1/400V
HRH-1/24V
HRH-4/230V
HRH-4/24V
HRH-5
HRH-6/AC
HRH-6/DC
3-M
Set
1-M
AC 230 V
AC 110 V
AC 400 V
AC/DC 24 V
AC 230 V
AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC
24-240 V box
IP65
AC 230 V
AC/DC 12-24V
Relay for factor cos-φ monitoring
Type
COS-1/230V
COS-1/110V
COS-1/400V
COS-1/24V
3-M AC 230V
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
3
Relay for frequency monitoring
Type
HRF-10
Monitoring values Setting
Description
AC 1-20 A
AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A
AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A
AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A
AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A
AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A
AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A
AC 0.05 - 0.5 A
AC 0.1 - 1 A
AC 0.2 - 2 A
AC 0.5 - 5 A
AC 0.8 - 8 A
AC 1.6 - 16 A
AC 0.5 - 25 A
AC 3 x 0.4 - 1.2 A
AC 3 x 2 - 6 A
Exceeding the current value - the current fl owing through the monitored conductor must not exceed 100 A even on a short-term basis
71
The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for every level
Galvanically separated power supply
The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for every level
Galvanically separated power supply
75
75
May be used for scanning the current from the current transformer - up to 600A
Power supply is galvanically separated from the measured current
May be used for scanning the current from the external current transformer - up to 600A
Monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value
Monitors exceeding the preset value
72
73
74
*
Monitoring values
0.1 - 0.99
Monitoring values
3-M AC
161 - 346V
1 40 - 60 Hz
48 - 72 Hz
320 - 480 Hz
Setting
Setting
Description
Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer.
Galvanically separated power supply
78
Unit with no protection devices - adequate protection element needs to be integrated before the unit. Ingress protection of the assembly is IP55
Measuring the frequency of 10 Hz will protect liquid from polarisation and measuring probes from increased oxidation
Galvanically separated power supply
* devices mainly designated for monitoring water level in fi re-engine tanks
82
77
80
Setting
Description
Two output relays, one independent relay for each level
Galvanically separated power supply
Description
Switchable ranges of rated frequency
84
85
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-41, HRN-42
!
Monitoring DC / AC 1-phase in 3 ranges
!
Monitoring voltage with 2 independent levels (overvoltage / undervoltage)
!
Two versions, HRN-41: Function “HYSTERESIS” a HRN-42: Function “WINDOW”
!
“MEMORY” function - manual reset key on frontal panel
!
function of second relay (independent/parallel)
!
Adjustable delay for short peaks
EAN code
HRN-41 /110V
HRN-41 /230V
HRN-41 /400V
HRN-41 /24V
HRN-42 /110V
HRN-42 /230V
HRN-42 /24V
8595188140430
8595188140409
8595188121521
8595188140416
8595188140478
8594030337653
8594030338070
Technical parameters HRN-41 HRN-42
!
Galvanically separated supply voltage
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/SDPT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for all monitored levels
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Description
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring
Ranges:
Terminals:
Input resistance:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay for Umax:
Time delay for Umin:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Dependance on temperature:
Tolerance of limit values:
Hysteresis (from fault to normal):
Output
A1 - A2
AC 110 V, AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
10 - 50 V (AC 50Hz)
C - B1
110 kΩ
100 V
250 V
32 - 160 V (AC 50Hz)
C - B2
360 kΩ
300 V
700 V adjustable, 0 -10 s adjustable, 0 -10 s
100 - 500 V (AC 50Hz)
C - B3
1.1 MΩ
600 V
5 %
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5 % selectable 5 % / 10 %
Supply indication
Adjusting upper level
- Umax
Indication Umax
Output indication
Indication Umin
Symbol
C
B1
B2
B3
~~
A1 16 18 26 28
Connection
MEMORY function
Function of 2nd relay
(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)
Hysteresis from faulty to OK normal state
Un t1 - time delay for Umax
Adjusting bottom level - Umin
Uin 100-500
10-50
Measured voltage AC or DC
32-160 t2 - time delay for Umin
A1 A2 C B1 B2 B3
Number of contacts:
2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
A2 15 25
Current rating:
16 A / AC1
Breaking capacity:
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
Inrush current:
30 A / < 3 s
16 15 18 28 25 26
Switching voltage:
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
Min. breaking capacity DC:
500 mW
Function
Output indication: yellow LED
Mechanical life:
3x10 7
Un
Electrical life (AC1):
0.7x10
5
Umax
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Other information
Uin
Operating temperature:
-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
Umin
Hysteresis
Storage temperature:
-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
Electrical strength:
4 kV (supply - output)
15-18
25-28
Operating position:
Mounting: any
DIN rail EN 60715
15-18
25-28
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
RESET
LED > U
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
LED < U
LED
Dimensions:
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
MEMORY-ON (DIP2)
Weight:
Standards:
239 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Relay is delivered in two versions – according to the way of setting and monitoring voltage levels.
HRN-41 has function Hysteresiss, which means that only upper level is set ( Umax) and lower level (Umin) is set in % from upper level. Therefore lower level automatically changes when changing upper level.
HRN-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that upper level (Umax) and lower level (Umin) are set independently in % from rated monitores range.
Both types have choice of function MEMORY, in case the relay gets into a faulty state it keeps output in this state until it is reset by button RESET. DIP switch No.3 can be used to choose if relays should switch individually for each level or in parallel in case any level of voltage is overrun. DIP switch No.4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when going from normal state to a faulty one.
Relay has protection against polarity reversing for DC voltage or incorrectly chosen AC-DC voltage (this fault is indicated by fl asching of both LEDs ( LED <U a LED >U).
61
Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x
EAN code
HRN-33
HRN-34
HRN-35
HRN-37
HRN-63
HRN-64
HRN-67
8595188115636
8595188115643
8595188115650
8595188130615
8595188130622
8595188130639
8595188130646
Technical parameters
Supply and measuring
Terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Upper level (Umax):
Bottom level (Umin):
Max. permanent:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Dependance on temperature:
Tolerance of limit values:
Hysteresis (from fault to normal):
Output - Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
HRN-33, HRN-37.
HRN-63, HRN-67
A1 16 18
HRN-33/ HRN-63
A1 - A2
AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 160 - 276 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
!
It serves to control supply voltage for appliances sensitive to supply tolerance, protection of the device against under/over voltage
!
HRN-3x is band voltage relay, HRN-6x is over/under voltage relay. For diff erence - see graph of function
HRN-33, HRN-63 - monitors voltage in range AC 48 - 276 V
- U max and U min can be monitored independently
HRN-34, HRN-64 - like HRN-33, but voltage range is DC 6 - 30 V
- monitoring of battery circuits (12, 24 V)
HRN-35 - like HRN-33, but independent output relays for each voltage level
- switching of other loads possible
HRN-37, HRN-67 - like HRN-33, monitors voltage in range AC 24 -150 V
- it is possible to monitor level of overvoltage and undervoltage independently
!
Adjustable time delay for all types is 0 - 10 s (to eliminate short voltage drops or peaks)
!
Voltage Umin adjusted as % of Umax
!
3-state indication - LEDs indicating normal state and 2 fault states
!
Supply from monitored voltage (monitors level of its own supply)
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
HRN-34/ HRN-64
A1 - A2
DC 6 - 30 V
DC max. 1.2 VA
DC 18 - 30 V
35 - 95 % Umax
DC 36 V
DC 50 V
HRN-35
adjustable 0 - 10 s
A1 - A2
AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 160 - 276 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
HRN-37/ HRN-67
A1 - A2
AC 24-150 V / 50Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 80-150 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
5 %
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5 %
2 - 6 % of adjusted value (only HRN-33, HRN-34, HRN-35, HRN-37)
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 1x chang. for each level of voltage,(AgNi) 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red/ green LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
HRN-34, HRN-64
A1
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
61 g (2.2 oz.) 73 g (2.6 oz.) 85 g (3 oz.) 61 g (2.2 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Connection
HRN-35
HRN-33, HRN-37.
HRN-63, HRN-67
A1 A2
HRN-34,
HRN-64
+
A1 A2
-
HRN-35
A1 A2
16 18
A1
16 18 26 28
A2
15
A2
15
A2
15 25 15 16 18
15 16 18
25 26 28
15 16 18
62
Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x
Indication LED
HRN-33, HRN-37
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un>Umax or Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
HRN-35
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Description
HRN-33, HRN-37
HRN-63, HRN-67
A1 A2
HRN-34
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un>Umax or Un<Umax
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
HRN-63, HRN-67
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
HRN-64
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Supply/monitoring voltage
HRN-35
A1 A2
Adjusting of upper value Umax
Adjusting of delay
Adjusting of bottom value Umin
Indication
Adjusting of upper value Umax
Adjusting of delay
Adjusting of bottom value Umin
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Supply/monitoring voltage
Indication
25 26 28
Output contact for Umin
15 16 18
15 16 18
Output contact
Output contact for Umax
Function HRN-33, 34, 35, 37 (band voltage relay)
>
>
HRN-33,HRN-37
HRN-35
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
HRN-34
Legend:
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage
Un - measured voltage
Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage
15-18 - switching contact of output relay No.1
25-28 - switching contact of output relay No. 2
LED ≥ Un - indication green
LED U - indication red
Monitoring relay series HRN-3x monitors level of voltage in single - phase circuits. Monitored voltage serves also as supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent (all occurrences) levels of voltage, when exceeded the output is activated. HRN-33 and HRN-34 - in normal state the output relay is permanently switched. It switches off when there is a limit settings. This combination of linkage of the output relay is advantageous when the full failure of supply (monitored) voltage is considered to be a faulty state in the same way as a decrease of voltage within the set level. Output relay is in both situations always switched off .
Diff erently HRN-35 version uses indipendent relay for each level, in normal state it is switched off . If the upper level is exceeded (for example overvoltage) 1 relay switches on, when the bottom level (e.g.
undervoltage) is exceeded 2 relay switches. It is thus possible to see the particular faulty state.
To eliminate short peaks in the main the time delay, which is possible to be set in range 0 - 10 s, is used. It functions when changing from normal to faulty state and prevents unavailing pulsation of the output relay caused by parasitive peaks. Time delay doesn´t apply when changing from faulty to normal state, but hysteresis (1-6% depends on the voltage setting) apply. Thanks to changeover contacts it is possible to get other confi gurations and functions according to actual requirements of the application.
Function HRN-63, 64, 67 (over/under voltage relay)
HRN-63, 64, 67
Legend:
Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage
Un - measured voltage
Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage
15-18 - switching contact of output relay
LED U> - indication red LED
Monitoring relay line HRN-6x serves to monitor levels of voltage in single-phase or DC circuits.
Monitored voltage is in the same time also supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent levels of voltage. When Umax is exceeded, output is activated. In case voltage level falls below Umin, output is deactivated. This combination is advantageous when full absence of supply voltage is understood as faulty state. as well as voltage drop in the frames of set level. To eliminate short voltage peaks in the main there is time delay which can be set in a range of 0-10 sec. Such delay applies in case of going from overvoltage to undervoltage. In case of returning from undervoltage to overvoltage this delay doesn’t apply. Thanks to changeover output contacts it is possible to reach various confi gurations and functions according to requirements or an application.
63
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N
!
Replacement for HRN-51 and HRN -51N
!
Relay monitors phase sequence and failure, exceeding of monitored voltage in 3 phase main
!
HRN-55 - supply from all phases, which means that function of relay is applicable also if one phase fails
!
HRN-55N - supply L1-N, it means that relay also monitors break of neutral point
!
Fixed delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable delay T2 (0.1-10s)
!
Faulty state is indicated by LED and output contact of relay is OFF.
!
Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
HRN-55
HRN-55N
8595188137225
8595188137232
Technical parameters
Monitoring terminals:
Supply terminals:
Voltage:
Level Umax:
Level Umin:
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
HRN-55 HRN-55N
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3,N
L1, L2, L3 L1, N
3x400 V / 50 Hz 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz
125 % Un
75% Un
max. 2 VA
5%
AC 3x460 V AC 3x265 V
AC 3x500 V AC 3x288 V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s
Description
Indication
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red LED
1x10 7
1x10 5
Output contact
Symbol
HRN-55
L1
-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
67 g (2.36 oz.) 66 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
3
~
U
L2 L3
HRN-55N
L1 N
3
~
U
L2 L3
Function
Function description
Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and failure of any phase. Green LED is permanently ON and indicates presence of power supply voltage. In case of phase failure or exceeding voltage level red LED fl ashes and relay breaks. When changing to faulty state, time delay applies. Time delay setting is set by a potentiometer on front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase sequence red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (OFF lower level)relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.
HRN-55: thanks to supply form all phases, this relay is able to stay operational also if one phase is out.
HRN-55N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitor also failure in neutral wire.
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L1
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L2
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L3
15-18 green LED red LED
16 18
15
16 18
15
L1
L2 L3
Connection
HRN-55
Hysteresis
16
15 18
L1
L2 L3
16
15 18
Supply/monitoring terminals
Adjusting of time delay T2
HRN-55N
Hysteresis
L1 N
L2 L3
16
15 18
64
Relay for monitoring over/under voltage in 3-phase mains HRN-57, HRN-57N
EAN code
HRN-57
HRN-57N
8595188137256
8595188137249
Technical parameters
Monitoring terminals:
Supply terminals:
Voltage:
Level Umax:
Level Umin:
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
HRN-57 HRN-57N
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3,N
L1, L2, L3 L1, N
3x400 V / 50 Hz 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz
105 - 125 % Un
75 - 95 % Un
max. 2 VA
5 %
AC 3x460V AC 3x265V
AC 3x500V AC 3x288V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s
!
It serves to monitor voltage in a switchboard, protection of devices in 3-phase main
!
It monitors value of voltage in 3-phase main
!
It is possible to set upper and lower level independently
!
Adjustable time delay eliminated short voltage peaks and failures in the main
!
The device is supplied from monitored voltage
!
Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by breaking output relay contact
!
Output contact 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1
!
Relay doesn’t monitor phase sequence
!
HRN-57 – supply from all phases, means that relay is functional also in case of failure in one phase
!
HRN-57N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire, replacement for HRN-52
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Description
Supply indication
Adjusting of time delay T2
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red LED
1x10 7
1x10 5
Output contact
Symbol
HRN-57
L1
-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
68 g (2.4 oz.) 66 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
3
~
U
L2 L3
HRN-57N
L1 N
3
~
U
L2 L3
Function
Function description
Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g. undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the set levels, output relay breaks and red LED shines (LED indicates faulty state – fl ashes when timing)
In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level) relay immediately breaks without delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.
In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped.
15-18
green LED
red LED
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L1
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L2
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L3
Connection
HRN-57
16 18
15
16 18
15
L1 N
L2 L3
Hysteresis
16
15 18
L1
L2 L3
16
15 18
Supply / monitoring terminals
Adjusting upper value Umax
Hysteresis
Indication
Adjusting bottom value Umin
HRN-57N
L1 N
L2 L3
16
15 18
65
Relay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase sequence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N
EAN code
HRN-54
HRN-54N
8595188137201
8595188137218
Technical parameters
Supply and measuring
Supply terminals:
Supply/measured voltage:
Level Umax:
Level Umin:
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Indication of state:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
HRN-54 HRN-54N
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3,N
L1, L2, L3 L1, N
3x400 V / 50 Hz 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz
105-125 % Un
75-95 % Un
max. 2 VA
5%
AC 3x460 V AC 3x265 V
AC 3x500 V AC 3x288 V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s
!
It serves to monitor voltage, phase failure and sequence in switchboards, protection of devices in 3-phase mains
!
It is possible to set upper and lower level of monitoring voltage
!
Adjustable time delay eliminates short voltage peaks and failures in the main
!
Supply is done from monitored voltage
!
Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by opening of output relay contact
!
Output contact 1x changeover / SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1
!
In case supply voltage falls below 60 %Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately opens without delay
!
HRN-54 –supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case when one phase is faulty
!
HRN-54N –supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Description
Supply indication
Adjusting of time delay T2
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red LED
1x10 7
1x10 5
Output contact
Symbol
HRN-54
L1
-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
69 g 67 g
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Function
3
~
U
L2 L3
HRN-54N
L1
N
3
~
U
L2 L3
Function description
Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g. undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the set levels, output relay opens and red LED shines ( LED indicates faulty state – fl ashes when timing).
In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level)relay immediately opens without delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.
In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped.
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L1
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L2
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L3
15-18 green LED red LED
16 18
15
16 18
15
L1 N
L2 L3
Connection
Hysteresis
16
15 18
HRN-54
L1
L2 L3
16
15 18
Supply/monitoring terminals
Adjusting upper value Umax
Adjusting bottom value Umin
Hysteresis
Output indication
HRN-54N
L1 N
L2 L3
16
15 18
66
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56
Monitoring terminals:
Supply terminals:
Supply/measured voltage:
Level Umin:
Level Uoff :
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1s:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Indication of state:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Technical parameters
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function description
!
Relay monitors phase sequence and failure (e.g. control of correct motor winding etc.)
!
Relay is designated for monitoring of 3-phase mains
!
Supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case of one phase failure
!
Supply and monitored supply Un:
1-MODULE
HRN-56/208 - 3x120V
HRN-56/208 - 3x208 V
HRN-56/240 - 3x240 V
HRN-56/400 - 3x400 V
3-MODULE
HRN-56/480 - 3x480 V
HRN-56/575 - 3x575 V
!
!
!
!
Fixed time delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable time delay T2 (0 -10s)
Faulty state is indicated by LED and by opening of output relay contact
Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A /250V AC1
1-MODULE, 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
HRN-56 /120V
HRN-56 /208V
HRN-56 /240V
HRN-56 /400V
HRN-56 /480V
HRN-56 /575V
8595188130745
8595188130134
8595188130141
8595188130158
8595188130189
8595188130196
HRN-56
120 208 240 400 480 575
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
3 x 120V/50Hz 3 x 208V/50Hz 3 x 240V/50Hz 3 x 400V/50Hz 3 x 480V/50Hz 3 x 575V/50Hz adjustable 70 - 95 % Un
60 % Un
max. 2 VA
5%
AC 3 x 160V AC 3 x 276V AC 3 x 460V AC 3 x 550V AC 3 x 660V
AC 3 x 180V AC 3 x 300V AC 3 x 500V AC 3 x 600V AC 3 x 700V max. 500 ms adjustable 0 -10 s
Description
1-MODULE
Indication
Adjusting of time delay
L1
L2 L3
16
15 18
Supply terminal
Adjusting value Umin
Output contacts
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC red LED
1x10 7
1x10 5
3-MODULE front panel
Indication
Adjusting value Umin
Adjusting of time delay
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 40 from front panel /
IP 10 terminals IP 20 terminals
III.
2
max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x1.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
66 g 66 g 66 g 67 g 108 g 108 g
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Symbol
3
~
L1
U
L3 L2
Function
16 18
15
Connection
L1
L2 L3
16
15 18
L1 L2 L3
16 16 15 15 18 18
Hysteresis
Umin
UOFF
L1
Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and phase failure. Green LED shines permanently and indicates energization. In case of phase failure red LED fl ashes and relay turns off . When changing to faulty state, time delay applies
– delay setting is done by potentiometer on the front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase sequence, red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty state is indicate by red LED.
HRN-56: Thanks to supply from all phases, relay is functional also in case of one phase failure.
UOFF
L2
UOFF
L3
15-18 t1 t2 green LED red LED
67
Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
EAN code
HRN-43 /230V
HRN-43 /400V **
HRN-43 /24V **
HRN-43N /230V
HRN-43N /400V
HRN-43N /24V
8594030337660
8595188121316
8594030338087
8594030338216
8595188120258
8594030338094
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Nominal voltage:
Terminals:
Upper level Umax:
Bottom level Umin:
Max. permanent overload:
Hysteresis:
Asymmetry:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay t1:
Time delay t2:
Accuracy
Set. accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
HRN-43 HRN-43N
A1 - A2
AC 230 V, AC 400 V, AC/DC 24 V / (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
3x400V / 50Hz
L1. L2. L3
240–480V
3x400V / 230V / 50Hz
L1. L2. L3, N
138–276V
35 - 99 % Umax
3x480 V adjustable 5 % or 10 % of set value
5 - 20 %
600 < 1ms 350V < 1ms fi xed, max. 200 ms adjustable 0-10 s
!
Monitoring 3-phase mains:
- voltage in 2 levels (undervoltage and overvoltage) in range 138-276V or 280-480 V (3x400 V)
- phase asymmetry
- phase sequence
- phase failure
!
Function “MEMORY” - for return from the faulty into normal state press button „RESET“ located on the front panel
!
HRN-43 - for circuits 3x400 V (without neutral)
!
HRN-43N - for circuits 3x400/230 V (with neutral)
!
2 output relays, selectable function of 2nd relay (independent / parallel)
!
Fixed (t1) and adjustable (t2) delay to eliminate short voltage drops and peaks
!
Galvanically separated supply voltage AC 400 V, AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Description
Supply voltage
Indication overvoltage/ undervoltage, failure
Sequence indication
Asymmetry indication
Selection of function MEMORY
Function of 2. relay
(1.-paralel, 2.-independent)
Hysteresis from faulty to normal state
Time pause t2
Umax adjusting
Asymmetry 5-20 % setting
Umin adjusting
Symbol
5 %
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5 %
2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
L1
L2
L3
HRN-43
A1
3
~
U
A2
Connection
HRN-43N
16 18 26 28
15 25
L1
L2
L3
N
HRN-43N
A1
3
~
U
A2
HRN-43
16 18 26 28
15 25
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
239 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
L1
L2
L3
N
Un
A1 A2 N L1 L2 L3
Un
A1 A2 L1 L2 L3
16 15 18 28 25 26 16 15 18 28 25 26
68
Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
Function
Overvoltage - undervoltage
L1
Umax
Umin
L2
Uma x
Umin
L3
Uma x
Umin
RESET t1 t2 t1
15-18
LED
25-28
Hysteresis t1 t2 t1
Hysteresis t2 t1
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time delay, fi xed t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec
15-18 output relay 1
25-28 output relay 2
LED U - indication overvoltage / undervoltage
Selection of 2nd relay function:
In order to monitor 2 levels of voltage, it is possible to select if output relay will respond to each level individually (see the diagram) or both relays will switch in parallel way (see diagram “phase sequence”).
Selection via DIP switch.
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Phase sequence
L1
L2
L3
RESET
15-18
(25-28)
LED t1
L3
L2 t1
L2
L3 t1
L3
L2 t1
L2
L3 t1
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time delay, fi xed t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec
15-18 output relay 1
25-28 output relay 2
LED indication of phase sequence
Selection of 2nd relay function:
The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence, the relays are switched in parallel way.
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Asymmetry - phase failure
L1
100%
0%
L2
100%
0%
L3
100%
0%
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time pause, fi xed t2 - time pause, adjustable 0-10 sec
- adjustable asymmetry 5-20%
15-18 output contact of relay 1
25-28 output contact of relay 2
LED - asymmetry indicator
100%
0%
RESET
Hysteresis t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1
Selection of 2nd relay function:
The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence, the relays are switched in parallel way.
DIP switch is ignored.
15-18
(25-28)
LED
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Function description
Relay is designated to monitor 3-phase circuits. Type HRN-43N controls voltage towards neutral wire, type HRN-43 controls interphase voltage. Relay can monitor voltage in two levels (overvoltage/ undervoltage), phase assymetry , sequence and failure. Each faulty state is indicated by individual LED. By DIP switch (No.3) it is possible to defi ne function of the other relay – independent function (1x for overvoltage, 1x for undervoltage) or in parallel. Time delays t1(fi xed) – when changing from faulty to normal state or when de-energized and t2 (adjustable) when changing from normal to faulty state. These delays prevent incorrect conduct and oscillation of output device during short voltage peaks in the main or during gradual voltage decline into normal.
Voltage control
Set upper level Umax in range 138-276 V (or 240 - 480 V for HRN-43) and lower level Umin in range 35-99% Umax. In case any phase passes this range, after a delay which eliminated short voltage peaks, contact opens. Output contact again switches after returning back into monitored voltage range and exceeding fi xed hysteresis (which is adjustable in two values by DIP switch).
Phase sequence
Monitors correctness of phase sequence. In case of unwanted change output contact breaks. In case of energization of a device with incorrect phase sequence, contact stays opened.
Asymmetry
Rate of assymetry between individual phases is set in a range of 5-20%. In case set asymmetry is exceeded, output relay breaks and LED indicating asymmetry shines. Delays t1, t2 and hysteretic are applicable when returning to normal state.
69
Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Used for optical signaling of the voltage level in three phases
Each phase features LED signaling broken down by color into voltage levels:
- voltage in tolerance of +/-15% - green
- overvoltage - red
- undervoltage - yellow
- voltage < 50V - LED not illuminated
Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N
Monitors phase voltages against neutral wire
Not dependent upon order of phases
Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N
In 1-MODUL design, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
MPS-1 8595188145978
Technical parameters
Supply voltage:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Power consumption:
Indication:
LED not illuminated:
LED illuminated:
- yellow
- green
- red
Other information
Design:
Mounting:
Pracovní poloha:
Coverage:
Overvoltage category:
Contamination level:
Working temperature:
Storage temperature:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
MPS-1
AC 3x400/230V, 50/60Hz
+20%, -75% max.1.0VA / 0,5W
0 ... 50V / 45 ... 0V
50 ... 207V / 195,5 ... 45V
207 ... 264,5V / 253 ... 195,5V
264,5 ... 276V / 276 ... 253V
1 module
DIN rail EN60715 any
Panel IP40, terminals IP10
III.
2
-20 ... +55°C
-30 ... +70°C
90x17.6x64mm
58 g
EN60947-1, EN60947-5-1
Connection
Description of device
Function
After connecting the supply voltage, the LED illuminates - the color corresponds to the voltage size of individual phases. If the phase voltage drops under 40V ( phase outage), the corresponding LED is not illuminated.
Description of function
Terminal L1
Terminal L2
L1 N
L2 L3
L1 N
L2 L3
Terminal N
Terminal L3
Indication L1
Indication L2
Indication L3
70
Current monitoring relay PRI-32
!
Current transformer is a part of the product. Inside this transformer there is a wire which senses the volume of fl owing current
!
This construction reduces thermal stress of product when compared with conventional solutions with inbuilt shunt, and increases current range up to 20 Amps, and galvanically separates monitored circuit
!
For heating bars in sliding rails, heating cables, indication of current fl ow, controlling of 1-phase motor consumption ...
!
Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V
!
Supply is galvanic separated from measuring current
!
Current exceeding – current fl owing through monitored wire must not exceed 100 A
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A
!
Clamp terminals
!
1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
PRI-32 8595188121965
Technical parameters
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Current range:
Current adjustment:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Overload capacity:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PRI-32
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V, DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 1.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
1 - 20 A (AC 50 Hz) potentiometer
5 %
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5% max.100 A /10 s
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC red LED
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
68 g (2.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
(AWG 12)
Description
Supply indication
Controlling cable outlet
(max. diameter 6mm)
Symbol
A1
A2
16 18
15
A1 A2
16
15 18
Connection
Un
A1 A2
16
15 18
Supply terminals
Output indication
Adjustment of access
current
Output contact
Function
Monitoring relay PRI-32 serves to monitor current level in single phase AC circuits. Due to its fl uent adjustment of release current, it is predestined for applications with necessity of current fl ow indication, and can be used as precedence relay. Output relay is off in normal state. In case the set current level is exceeded, it switches. Multivoltage supply is an advantage.
Imax
I
15-18
LED
Un
Hysteresis
71
Current monitoring relay PRI-51
EAN code
PRI-51 /0.5A
PRI-51 /1A
PRI-51 /2A
PRI-51 /5A
PRI-51 /8A
PRI-51 /16A
8595188142885
8595188124904
8595188124911
8595188124928
8595188124935
8595188124942
Technical parameters
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Load:
Current range:
PRI-51
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V a DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 1.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
PRI-51/0.5
AC0.05-0.5A
(AC50Hz)
PRI-51/1
AC0.1-1A
(AC 50Hz) between B1 - B2
PRI-51/2
AC0.2-2A
(AC 50Hz)
PRI-51/5
AC0.5-5A
(AC 50Hz)
PRI-51/8
AC0.8-8A
(AC 50Hz)
PRI-51/16
AC1.6-16A
(AC 50Hz)
!
It serves for monitoring of heating in rail-switches, heating cables, consumption of one-phase motors, indicates current fl ow
!
Flexible adjustment by potentiometer, choice of 6 ranges:
AC 0.05-0.5A; AC 0.1-1A; AC 0.2-2A; AC 0.5-5A; AC 0.8-8A; AC 1.6-16A
!
Adjustable delay 0.5 - 10 s to eliminate short current peaks
!
It is possible to use for current scanning from current transformer - up to 600 A!
!
Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V
!
Supply is not galvanically separated from measured current, it must be in the same phase
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A
!
1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, replacement for PRI-31
Description
Supply terminals
Adjusting current in % In
A1 A2
B1 B2
Measuring input (only AC)
Output Indication
Adjusting time pause
Recomended current transformers:
Max. permanent current:
Inrush overload <1ms:
Current adjustment:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis (fault to OK):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
0.5A
applicable also for current transformer more information page 87
1 A 8 A 2 A 5 A
100 A potentiometer adjustable 0.5-10 s
5 %
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5 % (10% for 0.05-0.5A range)
5 %
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC green / red LED
16 A
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
58 g ( 2 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Symbol
A1 A2
B1 B2
16 18
Example of an order
15
15 18
Connection
L
N
16
Un
16
A1 A2
B1 B2
15 18
Example Connection: PRI-51 with current transformer for current range increase
Load
Hysteresis
A1 A2
B1 B2
16
Un
15 18
I s
Output contact
I p
Current transformer
Always specify all reference name of current relay according to required range, for example PRI-51/5.
Monitoring relay PRI-51 serves to monitor current level in one-phase AC circuits. Gradual setting of actuating current of monitoring relay enables many diff erent applications. Output relay is in normal state opened. After the set current level is reached, relay closes after the set delay (0.5-10s).
When returning from faulty to normal state there is a hystersis (5%). Multi-voltage of this relay is an advantage. It is possible to monitor load which doesn´t have the same supply as monitoring relay PRI-51.
Range of PRI-51 can be increased by an external current transformer.
72
Current monitoring relay PRI-52
!
Relay is designated for:
- distant device diagnostic (short circuit, take-off increasing)
- preferred (priority) relay – two appliances (boiler and fl oor heating) operating on one phase, but never run
together – prevention against current overload and circuit breaker tripping. Enables to save your main breaker expenses.
- current tranzit indicator – informs about heating activation, ceramic hob, ventilator….
- changing over of appliances according to inverter‘s (converter) output by photocell applications
!
!
NEW – hole for threaded conductor passes through the body of device
Part of device is current transformer, which is sensing size of current in threaded conductor
!
!
Possible to use also for sensing of current up to 600A from external current transformer
Slight setting (by potentiometer ) of tripping current – range AC 0.5….25A
!
!
Slight setting (by potentiometer) of delay – adjustable in range 0.5…..10s
Supply voltage AC 230V
!
!
Output contact 1x changeover /SPDT 8A (AC1)
1-phase version, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals
Device describtion
EAN code
PRI-52 8595188136556
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Burden (apparent):
Burden (loss):
Measuring circuit:
Current range:
Maximal permanent current:
Inrush overload <1s:
Current adjustment:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching power:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PRI-52
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
-15 %; +10 % max. 5 VA max. 1.4 W
AC 0.5 ... 25A / 50 Hz
25A
100 A
potentiometer
adjustable 0.5 ... 10 s
Supply terminals
Supply voltage indication
Hole for threaded conductor
(max. Ø 5.8 mm/0.23
˝
)
Adjusting of time delay
A1 A2
5
0.5
10 15
20
25
In 0.5 - 25A
Output indication
Adjusting of current in A
10 %
<1 %
< 0.2 % / °C
10 %
0.25A
16
15 18
Output contact
1x changeover /SPDT (AgNi/Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
red LED
Symbol Connection
-20 °C to +55 °C ( -4 °F to 131 °F )
-30°C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to158°F )
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP40 from front panel / IP10 terminals
III.
2 max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
64 g (2.26 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
A1
A2
16 18
15
Un
A1 A2
16
15 18
I
Un
A1 A2
I p
I s current transformer
16
15 18
Connection example: PRI-52 with current transformer for increasing of current range.
Functions
Imax
I
15-18
LED I > t hysteresis
Monitoring relay PRI-52 serves for monitoring of current level in 1-phase AC circuits. Slight setting of release current level designates this relay for many various applications. Output relay is in normal status switched off . When set current level is overrun, relay get closed after preset delay. By return from error to normal status is used hysteresis.
PRI-52 range is possible to increase with external current transformer.
Adventage of PRI-52 is that the hole for threaded conductor is located under the level of covering in the switchboard – thanks that, threaded conductor is not accessible for unwanted manipulation.
73
Three-phase relay PRI-53
6
EAN code
PRI-53/1
PRI-53/5
8595188142137
8595188142144
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Current monitoring terminals:
1st phase:
2nd phase:
3rd phase:
Supply voltage:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Operating AC frequency:
Burden: (max):
Rated current In:
Current level - I:
Overload capacity
- continuous:
- max.3s:
Diff erence:
Delay (until failure):
Output relay - contact:
AC contact capacity:
DC contact capacity:
Mechanical life:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh
(power supply – relay contact):
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PRI-53/1
A1, A2
PRI-53/5
I1, I2
I3, I4
I5, I6
24 - 240V AC/DC
± 10%
45 - 65 Hz
3VA / 1.2W
AC 1A AC 5A adjustable 40 - 120% In
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
It is intended for monitoring the current in three-phase devices (e.g. cranes, motors, etc.)
24-240 V AC/DC power supply galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current
Adjustable current level in % of In:
Fixed diff erence level
Adjustable delay level (when exceeding the preset limit)
Adjustable function:
- UNDER - monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value I
- OVER - exceeding the preset value I
2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A)
6-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Output relay with 2 changeover contacts
Option of connecting via the current transformers to increase the value of the monitored current by up to 600 A
Connection
Example of connection: PRI - 53 with a current conversion transformer for increasing the current range.
N
L1
L2
L3
Un
A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 I4
LOAD
2A 10A
20A 50A fi x 1 % In adjustable 0.5 - 10s
2x schangeover / DPDT (AgNi) gilded
250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA
30V / 8A
3x10 6 at rated load
Device describtion
Supply voltage terminals
-20.. +55 °C
-30.. +70 °C
4 kV / 1 min.
III.
2
IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminal max 2 x 1.5mm
2 / 1 x 2.5mm
2
90 x 105 x 64 mm
208 g 208 g
EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2,
EN 61000-6-4
Supply voltage indication
Indication of exceeding the preset limit
Current level setting
UNDER / OVER function setting
16 15 18 28 25 26
A1 A2
PRI-53/1
I5 I6
16 15 18 28 25 26
I1 I2 I3 I4
Current monitoring terminals
I5 I6
Delay setting
Output contacts
Current monitoring
terminals
Functions
After the supply voltage is connected the green LED is on.
UNDER function:
If the strength of the monitored current in all phases exceeds the preset level I, the relay is triggered and the red
LED is off . If the strength of the monitored current drops in any phase below the level I, the relay is disconnected after the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the delay.
If the strength of the monitored current returns above the level I + diff erence, the relay is triggered without delay and the red LED goes off .
OVER function:
If the strength of the monitored current is lower in all phases than the preset level I, the relay is disconnected and the red LED is off .
If the strength of the monitored current exceeds in any phase the level I, the relay is triggered after the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the delay.
If the strength of the monitored current again drops below the level I - diff erence, the relay is disconnected without delay and the red LED goes off .
74
Current monitoring relay PRI-41, PRI-42
EAN code
PRI-41 /230V
PRI-41/24V
PRI-42 /230V
PRI-42 /24V
8595188140485
8595188140492
8595188140515
8595188140522
!
To monitor overloading / discharge ( machine, motor...), load sensing, diagnostics of remote device (interrunption, short circuit, current cunsumption increase...)
!
Monitors AC/DC 1-phase current in 3 ranges
!
Monitoring adjusted current in 2 independent levels
!
PRI-41: “HYSTERESIS” function and PRI-42: “WINDOW” function
!
function of 2nd relay (independent/parallel):
“MEMORY” function - manual reset.
“RESET” button on the frontal panel
!
Adjustable time delay for each level
!
Galvanically separated supply
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for each current level
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Technical parameters PRI-41 PRI-42
Description
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Ranges:
Terminals:
Input resistance:
Max. permanent current:
Inrush overload <1ms:
Time delay for Imax:
Time delay for Imin:
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis (fault to OK):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
A1 - A2
AC 230 V or AC / DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
4 - 16 A (AC50Hz)
C - B1
5 mΩ
16 A
20 A
1.25 - 5 A (AC50Hz)
C - B2
11 mΩ
5 A
6.3 A adjustable 0-10 sec adjustable 0-10 sec
0.4 - 1.6 A (AC50Hz)
C - B3
50 mΩ
1.6 A
2 A
5 %
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5 % selectable 5 % / 10 % changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW yellow LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
239 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Meassured AC or DC
Supply indication
Indication Imax
Output indication
Indication Imin
Adjusting bottom level - Imin
Symbol
C
B1
B2
B3
Function
Un
Imax
I
Imin
15-18
25-28
15-18
25-28
RESET
LED > I
LED < I
LED
A1
A2
16 18 26 28
15 25
Hysteresis
Connection
Hysteresis
Un t1 - time delay for Imax
Adjusting upper level - Imax
1.25-5
4-16
MEMORY function
Function of 2nd relay
(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)
Hysteresis from faulty to OK
I 0.4-1.6
normal state t2 - time delay for Imin
A1 A2 C B1 B2 B3
16 15 18 28 25 26
Hysteresis
MEMORY-ON (DIP2)
Relay is delivered in two versions - according to setting and level monitoring .
PRI-41 has function hysteresis, which means that you set only upper level (Imax) and lower level is set in % from upper level. Therefore when upper level is changed, lower level changes automatically.
PRI-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that you set upper level (Imax) and lower level (Imin) individually in % of rated monitored range.
Both types have selectable function MEMORY. In case the relay gets to faulty state, this function leaves relay in this state until it is reseted by RESET button. DIP switch No. 3 can be used to choose if output relay should switch for each level separatelly, or in parallel in case any current level is exceeded. DIP switch No. 4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when changing from faulty to normal state. Relay is protected against re-poling of DC current, or wrong AC/DC current (this fault is indicated by LED <I a LED >I common fl ashing).
75
Current transformator SR - for Monitoring current relay PRI
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Accessory to monitoring relay PRI series, for extension of max. controlled current max. cable 35 mm (1 ˝)
Max. cable size:
- solid conductor: max. 6 mm 2
- wire max. 4 mm
2
Bus-bar to max. dimension 40x10 mm ( 2 ˝ x 0.4 ˝)
Frenquency: 50 - 60 Hz
Constant overload capacity: 1.2 x In
Output current: 0 - 5 A
1-phase, DIN rail or panel mounting
EAN code
SR051
SR101
SR151
SR200
SR250
SR300
SR400
SR600
8595188117425
8595188117432
8595188117449
8595188117456
8595188117463
8595188117470
8595188117487
8595188117494
Technical parameters
Max. wire diameter:
Max. bus-bar profi le:
Primary current (A):
Accuracy class:
0.5
1
3
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
SR051
-
50
22
SR101
22
-
100
Rated capacity (VA):
-
1.25
1.5
2
2.5
3.5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
3
4
5
SR151
22
-
150
SR200
23
SR250
23
30x10
200
Rated capacity (VA):
30x10
250
4
7
6
9
8.5
11
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
SR300
35
40x10
300
SR400
35
40x10
400
Rated capacity (VA):
4
8
12
8
12
15
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
12
15
15
SR600
35
40x10
600
76
Level switch HRH-5
EAN code
HRH-5 /UNI 8595188136396
Technical parameters
Functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input:
Toleration of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivity ( input resistance):
Voltage n electrodes:
Current in probes:
Time response:
Max. capacity of probe cable:
Time delay (t):
Time delay after switching on (t1):
Accuracy
Accuracy in setting (mechanical):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching voltage:
Switched voltage:
Min. switched output DC:
Mechanical life (AC1):
Electrical life:
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght:
Operational position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvltage category:
Pollution degree:
Profi le of connecting wires (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Recommended measuring probes:
Symbol
C
D
H
A1
A2
HRH-5
2
A1 - A2
24... 240 V AC/ DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 2 VA
-15 %; +10 % adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ max. AC 3.5 V
AC <0.1 mA max. 400 ms
800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ) adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec
1.5 sec
± 5 %
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy )
8 A / AC1
2500 VA , 240 W
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
1x10 7
1x10 5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
3.75 kV (supply - sensors) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from font panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
AWG 10 (2.5 mm2)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
72 g (2.5 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg. 83
16 18
15
!
Relay is designed for monitoring levels in wells, basins, reservoirs, tanks....
!
In one device you can choose the following confi gurations:
- one-level switch of conductive liquids (by connecting H and D)
- two-level switch of conductive liquids
!
One-state device monitors one level, two-state device monitors two levels (switches on one level and switches off on another level)
!
Choice of function PUMP UP, PUMP DOWN
!
Adjustable time delay on the output (0.5 - 10s)
!
Sensitivity adjustable by a potentiometer (5-100kΩ)
!
Measuring frequency 10Hz prevents polarization of liquid and raising oxidation of measuring probes
!
Galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 VAC/DC
!
Output contact 1xchangeover/SPDT 8A/250V AC1
!
In 1-module type, mounting onto a DIN rail
Device description
Indication of supply voltage
Choice of function
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for conection of probes H, D
Output indication
Choice of function
Output contacts
Connection
Monitoring of two levels
Un
A1 A2
H D max min
Tank with
monitored level
16 C
15 18
Terminal for connection of probe C
Monioring of one level max
Adjustment of delay on output
Un
A1 A2
H D
16 C
Tank with monitored level
15 18
Function
Function PUMP UP Function PUMP DOWN
Un max level min
Un max level min t t t
15-18 red LED
15-18 red LED t
Relay is designated for monitoring of levels of conductive liquids with possibility of functions: PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN. To prevent polarization and liquid electrolysis of liquid, and undesirable oxidation of measuring probes, alternating current is used. For measuring use three measuring probes: H- upper level,
D- lower level, C - common probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, you can use it as probe C. In case you require monitoring of one level only, it is neccessary to connect inputs H and
D and connect them to one probe - in this case sensitivity is lowered by half (2.5... 50kΩ). Probe C can be connected with a protective wire of supply system (PE). To prevent undesirable switching out output contacts by various infl uences (sediment on probes, humidity...) it is possible to set sensitivity of the device according to conductivity of monitored liguid (corresponding to “resistance” of liquid) range 5 up to 100kΩ.
To reduce infuences of undesirable switching of output contacts by liquid gorgle in tanks, it is possible to set delay of output reaction 0.5 - 10s.
77
Level switch HRH-1
EAN code
HRH-1 /230V
HRH-1 /24V
8594030337783
8594030338209
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Hysteresis (input - opening):
Voltage on electrode:
Current in probes:
Time reaction:
Max. cable capacity:
Time delay tD:
Time delay tH:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Measuring sensors:
Measuring probes
HRH-1
3
A1 - A2
AC 230V, AC/DC 24V (galvanicaly separated) or AC 110V(AC 50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
!
!
!
!
Used to check the level in wells, reservoirs, tanks, pools, tankers, containers, etc.
Within the framework of a single device, the following confi gurations can be selected (see functions graph):
- two separate level switches
- two probes in one tank
- fi lling tank from well
Single-state monitors one level (full or empty tank), double-state monitors two levels (switches on upon one level and switches off upon the second)
DIP switch on front panel is used to choose function (see functions graph):
- pumping in
- pumping out
!
!
!
!
!
!
Option of setting time delay for reacting to the output upon a change in level, any type of delay by DIP switch
Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer (probe resistance based on fl uid)
The measuring frequency 500 Hz prevents fl uid polarization and oxidation increase of measured probes
Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V or AC 110 V
Output contact 2x switches 16 A / 250 V AC1
In 3-MODULE design, fi xing to DIN rail
Symbol
Connection
H
S
C
D
A1
A2
16 18 28 26
15 25
Un
A1 A2 C D H S in an adjustable range 5 kΩ- 100 kΩ max. AC 5 V
AC <1 mA max. 400 ms
4 nF adjustable 0.5 -10 sec adjustable 0.5 -10 sec
± 5 %
Description
Terminal for connection of conductor common for both probes
Supply voltage terminals
16 15 18 28 25 26
Terminals for connecting probe
Terminals for connecting shield
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
Supply voltage indication
H relay indication
(OUT2)
D relay indication
(OUT1)
A1 A2 C D H S
DIP
Delay setting relay H
Delay setting relay D
16 15 18 28 25 2
6
Sensitivity setting of probe according to resistance of measured fl uid
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with cavern max. 1x1.5
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
240 g (8 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg. 83
Output contact of D relay - OUT1
Output contact of H relay - OUT2
Description and importance of DIP switches
There can be any measuring probe (any conductive contact, it is recommended to use brass or stainless steel).
The probe wire does not need to be shielded, but it is recommended. When using a shielded wire, the shielding is connected to terminal S.
2 separate tanks change of function of relay D relay D - delayed close relay H - delayed close
78
Level switch HRH-1
Functions
Two separate level switches
Un sonda D
LED D
OUT1- relay D tD tD probe H
LED H
OUT2 - relay H tH
When the tank is empty relay D open, relay H is closed tH
Un probe D
LED D
OUT1- relay D tD probe H
LED H
OUT2 - relay H tH
When the tank is empty both relays are switched tH tD
Two probes in single tank
Un probe D probe H
LED D
OUT1- relay D
LED H
OUT2 - relay H tD tD
Un probe D probe H
LED D
OUT1- relay D
LED H
OUT2 - relay H tD tD tH tH tH tH
The relay, which is used to control the level liquids conductive (water, chemical solutions, food, etc.).
In this principle, it goes on about the measurement of liquids by measuring probes. As the measuring used signal is 5V AC/ 500Hz. Using an AC signal prevents the the increasing oxidation of probes and unwanted polarization and electrolysis liquid. During depending on the DIP settings confi gurations, switches can control two independent levels or use a combined function for one level (see diagram of functions).
The relay is equipped with regulation of the sensitivity to to liquid resistance. It‘s also possible to eliminate some of the unwanted switching in the sensitivity settings according to specifi c conditions
(for example, pollution probe sediments, humidity, etc.). It‘s also possible for each probe to set the delay in the range of 0.5-10s, and using the DIP switch type delay (when you turn the relay on and off , depending on application).
Example of usage:
For controlling two independent tanks
Un
For controlling the level combination of upper and bottom probe
Un
A1 A2 C D H S
A1 A2 C D H S
container with the monitored level container with the monitored level container with the monitored level
16 15 18 28 25 26
16 15 18 28 25 26
Pump control or other output device Pump control or other output device
Output relays for pump control or other output devices,
Selecting contacts is depending on the selected function
Note:
As a common probe, it could be used with an advantage such as metal pipes, tanks, etc.
Due to the isolation of probes from a supply voltage, and the measured voltage which is up to 5V, it is possible to connect probes using standard communication cables.
79
EAN code
HRH-6 /AC
HRH-6 /DC
HRH-6S
8595188136990
8595188137409
8595188137416
Technical parameters
Function:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivityan adjustable range*:
Voltage on probes:
Probe cable maximum capacity:
Time delay:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching voltage:
Peak current:
Switching voltage:
Min. switching capacity DC:
Mechanical life (AC1):
Electrical life:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
El. strength (supply – probes):
Operating position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Recommended measuring probe:
HRH-6 / DC HRH-6 / AC
2
12..24V DC 230V AC/50-60Hz max. 1.8 W max.3.8 VA
+/- 20% -20 %; +10 %
!
Function 1 is monitoring minimal and maximal level depth, for example in fi re engine cars, tanks etc.
!
Function 2 is monitoring level depth in water collectors, basins, pools ec.
!
Selection of particular function is made by jumper on the front panel
!
Level depth is indicated on the panel of device by LED
!
Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes (one probe is common)
!
Common probe can be replaced by a metal (conductive) tank
!
Level indicationby six LED‘s on the front panel of the device
!
It is possible to connect another indication module (e.g. in fi re-engine cabin)
!
Adjustable sensitivity according to liquid conductvity
!
Adjustable time delay - elimination of level movement, e.g. while a tank is being fi lled up
!
Measuring frequency 10 Hz to prevent polarization of liquid
!
Supply voltage 12.... 24 V DC (to be used in fi re-engines) or galvanically separated 230 VAC for general use
!
Contact relay 10A for signalization of full/empty tank (according to a chosen function)
!
Choice of functions PUMP UP/OFF/PUMP DOWN by a switch located on the front panel of the device
!
Protection degree IP65
Description of function:
Connection of HRH-6 in a block
SENS. DELAY
+ +
- -
Sensitivity setup Delay setup min. 10...20kΩ max. 100...150kΩ max. 3V AC
500nF (for min. sensitivity), 50nF (for maximum sensitivity) adjustable 1...10s
6xLED (1x red, 1x yellow, 4x green)
1x NO-SPST (AgNi/ Silver Alloy )
10A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 200 W / DC
16 A / < 3s
250V AC1 / 24V DC
500 mW
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
Basic unit
Function switch
Jumper
- function selection
Cable for connecting probes
HRH-6/DC
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
x 3.75 kV any
IP 65 x III.
2
110x135x72 mm (4.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 2.8˝)
384 g (13.55 oz.) 284 g (13.55 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg.83
Cable for connecting auxiliary signalling
Supply cable / relay contact
HRH-6/S
LED6
- level L5 indication
LED5
- level L4 indication
LED4
- level L3 indication
LED3
- level L2 indication
LED2
- level L1 indication
LED1 - supply voltage indication
Auxiliary signalling
* Note: product is in a state of prototype, may be a subject of alternations .
Connection
HRH-6/DC HRH-6/AC
L2
L1
C
L5
L4
L3
+Un 18
15
L2
L1
C
L5
L4
L3
L
18
15
Basic unit connecting
LED6
- level L5 indication
LED5
- level L4 indication
LED4
- level L3 indication
LED3
- level L2 indication
LED2
- level L1 indication
LED1 - supply voltage indication
- Un
N
80
Level switch HRH-6
Level switch HRH-6
HRH-6 block connecting
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 C
PD
SW
PU
PU SW PD
N
L
LED4
LED5
LED6
+ 6V
LED1
LED2
LED3
- Un
L3
L4
L5
C
L1
L2
+ Un
15
18
HRH-6/AC
LED4
LED5
LED6
+ 6V
LED1
LED2
LED3
HRH-6/S
15
18
AC 230V *
L
N
*By HRH-6/DC, incoming supply is connected on terminals +Un and - Un.
Functions
J1
J1
Un
L1
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
L5
L4
L3
L2
15-18
15-18
15-18
15-18
NAPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP UP
VYPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP DOWN
NAPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP UP
VYPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP DOWN
This device monitors level of a conuctive liquid in a tank by using six single probes or one 6-fold probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, it is possible to use it as a common probe C.
This common probe is connected to a pole of supply (for fi re-engines it means its body) in case of supply voltage 12...24VDC.
In case of supply voltage 230VAC, the circuits are galvanically separated from the main.
The device is controlled by a three-position switch PUMP UP/OFF/ PUMP DOWN. After switching into a position PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN, red LED1 shines and then also LED2...LED6 according to liquid level. Output relay has 2 selectable functions.
Funtion setting is done by a jumper on basic board of HRH-6.
Function 1: ( for use in fi re-engines) - jumper is applied. In case of function PUMP UP and level reaching L5, the relay controlling e.g. acustic signalization, permanently closes and indicated full tank. In case of PUMP DOWN function and level dropunder level L3, relay priodically switches and under L2 it switches permanently (indicates almost empty tank) .
Function 2: (for keeping liquid level) - jumper is not applied. In case of PUMP UP, sensor is switched until liquid reaches level L5. Then relay opens and switches again in case the lliguid level falls under level
L1. In case of PUMP DOWN - relay is switched until liquid falls under level L1. Then relay opens and switches again on level L5.
To eliminate LED fl ashing while level gurgle it is possible to delay reaction of probes (set delay 1..10s). According to conductivity of liquid it is possible to set sensitivity of probes (corresponding to
“resistance” of liquid).
81
Level set HRH-4
EAN code
HRH-4 /230V
HRH-4 /24V
8595188117517
8595188117500
Technical parameters
Function:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivity ( input resistance):
Voltage n electrodes:
Current on probes:
Time response:
Max. capacity of probe cable:
Time delay (t):
Time delay (t1):
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech):
Output
Number of contacts:
Rated thermal current:
Loading in AC3:
Mechanical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength (supply-output):
Operating position:
Protection degree:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
Function PUMP UP
Un max level min
Function PUMP DOWN
15-18 red LED
Un max level min
15-18 red LED
82
!
In an easy way it automates operations of pumps depending on level
!
Control of level in wells, tanks, reservoirs...
!
It is delivered as a connected set – easy installation
!
Possibility to monitor level of any type of conductive liquid
!
It serves for an automatic operation in 1-phased and 3-phased pumps
!
Set of level switch HRH-5 and a contactor VS425
!
Function choice – pumping up or down
!
Unit requires incoming over-current protection
!
Protection degree of the set is IP55
!
There is a possibility of 4 types of probes in a various design (they are not a part of this set, it is possible to deliver)
!
Unit is placed in a plastic box with dimensions 160x135x83mm
HRH-4
2
AC/DC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
7 VA
-15 %; +10 % adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ max. AC 3.5 V
AC <0.1 mA max. 400 ms
800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ) adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec
1.5 sec
± 5 %
4x switching
25 A
5.5 kW / 400 V
3x10
6
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV, galvanically insulated any
IP 55
2
160 x 135 x 83 mm ( 6.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 3.3˝)
834 g (29.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 t t t t
Connection
HRH-4/230V
A1 A2
H D
HRH-5
16 C
15 18 protection element
VS425-40
230V AC/DC
M
230 V control lamp
Function description
1) PUMP UP - in case the level falls under a lower limit ( sensor D), a relay switches and a pump pumps a liquid up until it reaches an upper limit ( probe H), then a relay opens and a pump stops pumping. When a level reaches a lower limit again, all process is repeated.
2)
After the device is energized, relay automatically closes and a pump pumps liquid to upper limit.
PUMP DOWN - in case a level reaches over an upper limit, a relay closes and a pump pumps liquid down.
In case a level reaches a lower limit, a relay opens and a pump stops pumping.
When energized, a relay is in an open state and a pump operates only after an upper limit is exceeded.
3) In case you combine inputs H and D and connect them to one probe, the device will keep only one level
(upper and lower limit will become one).
In function PUMP UP relay closes in case the level falls under a probe level. A pump pumps liquid up and in case the level reaches a probe level, a relay opens and a pump stops.
The level is kept in a small range around the probe.
In function PUMP DOWN relays closes in case a level reaches a probe level. A pump pumps down until the level reaches a probe, then relay opens and pump stops.
Level switches accessories - Level sensors SHR
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
SHR-1-M: brass sensor
SHR-1-N: stainless steel sensor
Sensor to control fl ooding
Electrode with diametr 4 mm / 0.2” is placed in plastic cover
Panel or to holder mounting
Conductor is connected to terminal board, shrink bushing for feeder place insulation is a part of device
Max. wire profi le: 2.5 mm 2 (AWG10)
Installation: after connecting a wire to the sensor, run the shrink bushing over the wire onto the sensor.
Heat the sensor and by shrinking the connection of sensor and wire will be hermetical
Weight: 9.7 g (0.3 oz.)
Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F)
Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ”
SHR-1-M SHR-1-N
EAN code
SHR-1-M
SHR-1-N
8595188110105
8595188111379
EAN code
SHR-2 wire to SHR-2
8595188111263
8595188129770
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Level probe SHR-2
Detection sensor is electrode, which in connection with switchable device is used for level detection for example in wells,tanks,...
To be ued in electric conductive fl uids and mechanically polluted fl uids with temperature: +1 °C to +80 °C (33.8 °F to 176°F) stainless steel one-pole electrode reside in PVC cover, intended for tank wall mounting or mounting by socket
To ensure corret function of the sensor, it is necessary to have the electrode without dirt which could disable the connection of the electrode and fl uid and thus lead to malfunction
Max. wire profi le: 2.5 mm 2 (AWG10)
Recomended wire ÖLFLON FEP 1x1.0 BK
Installation:
- conductor wire is connected by feazing of two brass screws to stainless steel electrode
- conductor is caulked by bushing Pg7 with protection degree IP68
Weight: 48.6 g / 1.7 oz.
Dimensions: max. diameter 21 mm/ 0.8”, lenght 96 mm / 3.8”
SHR-2 in open state
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Level probe SHR-3
Stainless probe to be used into demanding industrial environments, designated for screwing into tank wall or cover
The probe is installed in horisontal, vertical or in sidelong position on tank side or in tank cover. Installation is done by soldering or by fi xing nut. It is necessary to use 24 mm (1” ) screw. It is necessary to use an adequate torque with regards to a seal and operational overpressure in a tank
Sensor has connecting wire - lenght 3 m, which is connected to sensor to scan electrode and sensor bushing connecting wire is double-wire PVC AWG 18 (0.75 mm 2 ) , connection of wires: brown - scan electrode, blue - sensor bushing
Connection M18x1.5 screw
Protection degree IP 67
Sensor weight without cable: 100 g (3.3 oz.)
Operating surroundings: place without the danger of detonation , temperature on screw: max. 95°C / 203 °F
Pressure immunity: on 25 °C / 77 °F 4 MPa, on 95°C / 203 °F 1.5 MPa
Weight: 239 g (8.4 oz.)
Material: bushing and sean electrode: stainless steel W.Nr. 1.4301, insulation insert of electrode: PTFE
Internal material: self - extinguishing epoxide resin
Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F)
Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ”
Dimensions
EAN code
SHR-3 8595188111270
83
Power factor monitoring relay COS-1
EAN code
COS-1 /230V
COS-1 /110V
COS-1 /400V
COS-1 /24V
8595188120906
8595188120265
8595188120272
8594030338131
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring
Voltage set:
Terminals:
Upper level cos-φ:
Bottom level cos-φ:
Max. permanent voltage:
Current range:
Current overloading:
Hysteresis:
Time delay t1:
Time delay t2:
Accuracy
Accuracy setting (mechanical):
Accuracy of repetition:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
A1 - A2
AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC/50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
3x400 V / 50 Hz
L1, L2, L3, B1 adjustable 0.1 - 0.99
adjustable 0.1 - 0.99
(input L1, L2, L3) AC 3x460 V
0.1 - 16 A
20 A (<3 sec.) adjustable 5% or 10% adjustable 0.5 - 30 s adjustable 0 - 10 s
5 %
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5 %
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
20 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW yellow LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
240 g (8 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
!
Relay monitors phase shift between current and voltage - cos-φ in 3-phase and also 1-phase mains for monitoring overload/unloading of motors
!
Supply set 3x400 V
!
Function “MEMORY” - manual reset - button on front panel
!
It is possible to connect current transformer in front of the device. This enables increase of current range
!
2 output relays, independent for each level
!
Adjustable delay to eliminate short peak overloading
!
Adjustable range and bottom level cos-φ, of power factor between 0.1- 0.99
!
Adjustable delay to eliminate starting of motor
!
Selectable hysteresis 5 or 10%
!
Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Description
A1 16 18 26 28
B1
L1
L2
L3
Supply voltage
Connection
Function
L1-L2-L3
MAX
COS
φ
MIN
RESET
15-18
25-28
LED
φ
LED
φ
LED
A2 t1
φ
Upper level - max exceeding
Output indication
Bottom level- min exceeding
Adjusting bottom level - Cos φ MIN
P
Un
S
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26
15 25 t2 t1
Un
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26 t2 t1
Sellection of function MEMORY
2nd relay function
(1-parallel , 2- independent)
Hysteresis from faulty to normal state
Time delay t1 for motor starting
Upper level - MAX
Time delay t2 for peak elimination t2
Un
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26 t1
MEMORY ON (DIP-2)
After the device is switched on, the yellow LED fl ashes for time t1 and both relays are switched (state OK). This delay serves to eliminate a faulty state e.g. motor start-up. If the upper limit is exceeded
(cosφ - max) red LED shines > cosφ . After a time delay t2 the output relay opens (15-18). Equally, if it falls under bottom limit (cosφ - min) red LED shines < cosφ and after a time delay t2 the output relay opens (25-28). In case the load is disconnected (no current), red LED shines >cosφ (cosφ = 1).
84
Frequency monitoring relay HRF-10
3
!
The relay serves to monitor frequency of AC voltage, e.g. in photovoltaic power stations, generators
The monitored frequency 50/60/400 Hz is selected by a switch
!
Supply from monitored voltage
!
Two adjustable levels of frequency (Fmin, Fmax) in the range of 80 - 120% Fn
!
Adjustable diff erence level
!
Adjustable delay level
!
Switchable ranges of rated frequency Fn
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
HRF - 10
Technical parameters
Supply and monitoring terminals:
Supply voltage:
Rated frequency Fn:
Burden: (max):
Overload capacity:
- continuous:
- max.10s:
Frequency Fmax:
Frequency Fmin:
Diff erence:
Delay (until failure):
Opening level (Uopen):
Output relay - contact:
AC contact capacity:
DC contact capacity:
Mechanical life :
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght:
(napájení - kontakt relé):
Protection degree:
Overvltage category:
Pollution degree:
Profi le of connecting wires (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Rated frequency setting
HRF-10
L, N
161 - 346V
50 / 60 / 400 Hz
1.7VA / 1.1W
Device description
346V
416V adjustable 80 - 120 %Fn adjustable 80 - 120 % Fn adjustable 0.5 - 5 % Fn adjustable 0.5 - 10 s
161V
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi) gilded
250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA
30V / 8A
3x10
6 at rated load
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV / 1 min.
III.
2
IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminals max. 2 x 1.5mm
2
/ 1 x 2.5mm
2
(AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
125 g (4.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
Supply voltage indication
Indication F > Fmax
Indication F <Fmin
Output contacts
Functions
HRF-10
N L
16 15 18 28 25 26
Supply/monitored voltage terminals
Delay setting
Diff erence setting
Fmax setting
Fn setting
Fmin setting
Fn setting = 50Hz
Connection
L
N
Fn setting = 60Hz
N L
Fn setting = 400Hz
16 15 18 28 25 26
After the supply (monitored) voltage is connected the green LED is on.
If the value of the monitored frequency falls within the range between the two set levels Fmin - Fmax no red LED is on. The relay UNDER is triggered (contacts 15-16-18) and the relay OVER is disconnected
(contacts 25-26-28).
If the monitored frequency exceeds the set level Fmax, the relay OVER is triggered after the set delay timing elapses and the red LED OVER goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the timing.
If the monitored frequency drops below Fmax - diff erence, the relay is activated without delay and the red LED OVER goes off .
If the monitored frequency drops below the set level Fmin, the relay UNDER is disconnected after the set delay timing elapses and the red LED UNDER goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the timing. If the monitored frequency exceeds the level Fmin + the diff erence, the relay is triggered without delay and the red LED UNDER goes off .
If the monitored voltage is lower than the opening level Uopen both the relays are disconnected and both the red LED (UNDER and OVER) start fl ashing slowly - indicating insuffi cient supply voltage.
85
Analog
TER
Thermostats and hygrostats
s i n g l e t h e r m o s t a t s
TER-3A
-30 to +10 °C
(-22 °F to 50 °F) external NTC.
TER-3B
0 °C to +40 °C
(32 °F to 104 °F) external NTC.
TER-3C
+30 °C to +70 °C
(86 °F to 158 °F) external NTC.
TER-3D
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F) external NTC.
TER-3H
-15 °C to +45 °C
(5 °F to 113 °F) external NTC.
TER-3E
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F) external NTC.
TER-3F
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F) in-built NTC.
TER-3G
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F) external PT100.
TER-4
Wide and accurate range of setting -40 °C to +110 °C
(-40 °F to 230 °F) in ten ranges in one device, fi ne temperature setting.
2 inputs for NTC senzor, 2 outputs 16 A changeover/ SPDT, additional function
(memory, hysteresis, indication of faulty sensor).
Supply: AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (galv. separated ).
TER-7
Monitoring heating of motor winding in range given by resistance of in-built
PTC thermistor(1.8-3.3 kΩ), additional function (memory, reset), output contact
2x8A changeover/ SPDT,
supply: AC/ DC 24-240 V.
Thermo
ATR
Analog room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +40
0
°C
(+41 °F to +104 °F) night decline, fl ush mounted in to wiring box.
ATF
Analog fl oor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F)
„temporary temperature change “ in range
±10 °C/ 50 °F.
ATC
Combined thermostat with room and fl oor sensor,
temperature range
+5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F).
TEV
Digital
TER
Thermo
TEV-1
Thermostat with „dead zone“, independent adjustable range
-20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F), protection against freezing, water-
-proof type IP65.
TEV-2
Thermostat for regulation of heating (cooling), adjustable range
-20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F), externí sensor NTC, external sensor NTC, output contact 16A changeover/SPDT.
TER-9 Digital multifunction thermostat
2 temperature inputs, 2 outputs 8A changeover/ SPDT, 6 functions, in-built time switch clock, LCD with back light, galvanically sep.supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 24V, 2 MODUL.
Temperature range: -40 °C to +110 °C / -40 °C to 230 °F
62x34x153
IP65
Hygro-thermostat
Hygrostat
TEV-3
Thermostat for regulation of heating (cooling), adjustable range
+5 to +35 ° C (41°F to 149 °F), external sensor
NTC, output contact 16 A, control potentiometer and indication on panel.
62x34x153
IP65
RHV-1
Hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH
TEV-4
Single exteriors thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments (humid and contaminated, agressive and defective, industrial workshops, washing rooms, green-houses, cellars and cooling boxes…)
Temperature range:
-30 °C to +60 °C /
-30 °C to 140 °F
RHT-1
Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 to + 60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90%
DTR
Digital room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F) with in-built
(internal) sensor.
Intelligent regulation.
DTF
Digital fl oor thermostat with temperature range +5 ..+50 °C with external sensor,
16 A potential-free contact.
DTC
Digital combined thermostat with room and fl oor sensor with temperature range
+5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F), pre-programmed programs
ATV-1
Energy-saving digital thermostat for radiators, with temperature range
+8..+28°C.
Accessories to thermostats:
TC, TZ , PT-100
- external temperature sensors for thermostats in lengths 3m, 6m,12m
-TC/TZ: thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C
PT: element PT-100 (only TER-3G)
LKM-45
Wiring box for thermostat
mounting on a surface.
86
Thermostats and hygrostats
Type
Sensor
Supply
TER-4
TER-7
TER-9
TEV-1
TEV-2
TEV-3
TEV-4
ATR
ATF
ATC
DTR
DTF
TER-3A
TER-3B
TER-3C
TER-3D
TER-3E
TER-3F
TER-3G
TER-3H
DTC
RHT-1
RHV-1
ATV-1
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
1M-DIN
3M-DIN
1M-DIN
2M-DIN
IP65 box
IP65 box
IP65 box
IP65 box
ELEGANT
#
ELEGANT
#
ELEGANT
#
ELEGANT
ELEGANT
ELEGANT
IP65
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
1M-DIN #
#
#
# #
#
#
#
# # #
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#(2x)
#
#(2x)
#
#
#
#
#
# #
#
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
# PT100
NTC
NTC
PTC
NTC
INTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC built -in built -in
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
-30 °C to +10 °C
(-22 °F to 50 °F)
0 °C to +40 °C
(32 °F to 104 °F)
+30 °C to +70 °C
(86 °F to 158 °F)
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
(32.9 °F to 41 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
(32.9 °F to 41 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
(32.9 °F to 41 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
(32.9 °F to 41 °F)
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
1 °C (34 °F )
-15 °C to +45 °C
(5 °F to 113 °F)
1 °C/ 34 °F
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
(32.9 °F to 41 °F)
-15 °C to +45 °C
(5 °F to 113 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
(32.9 °F to 41 °F)
#
#
-40 °C to +110 °C
(-40 °F to 230 °F)
0.5 - 2.5 °C
(32.9 °F to 37 °F)
Resistance x
1.8-3.3 kΩ
-40 °C to +110 °C
(-40 °F to 230 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
(32.9 °F to 41 °F) single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor for temperature in cooling and against freezing single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor for sensing room and operational temperature
88
88 single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor for sensing temperature in devices (overheating...)
88 single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor as TER-3D but with fi xed hysteresis single thermostat into a switchboard with in-built sensor, monitors operational temperature in a switchboard
88 as TER-3D but with input for sensor PT100
89 as TER-3A but with a diff erent temperature range - for cooling and heating
88
89 two-state thermostat (2 inputs, 2 outputs), two independent or dependent thermostats, accurate setting, wide temperature range
90 thermistor relay for protection of motor overheating, input designated for sensor PTC in-built in motor winding
91 multifunction( 6thermo functions) digital thermostat with in-built time switch clock, 2 inputs/2 outputs
92
-20 to +20 °C
( -4 °F to +68 °F)
-20 to +20 °C
( -4 °F to +68 °F)
+5 to +35 °C
(41°F to 149 °F)
-30 °C to +65 °C
(-22 °F to 149 °F)
1.5 °C (35 °F )
1.5 °C(35 °F )
1.5 °C(35 °F )
0.5 / 1.5 / 4 0 C
32.9/ 35/39 °F
+5 to +40 °C
( +41 °F to +104 °F)
1 °C (34 °F )
+5 to +50 °C
( +41 °F to +122 °F)
1 °C (34 °F )
+5 to +50 °C
( +41 °F to +122 °F)
1 °C (34 °F )
+5 to +50 °C
0.5 -1°C
( +41 °F to +122 °F)
(32.9 °F to 34 °F)
+5 to +50 °C
0.5 -1 °C
( +41 °F to +122 °F)
(32.9 °F to 34 °F)
+5 to +50 °C
0.5 -1 °C
( +41 °F to +122 °F)
(32.9 °F to 34 °F) thermostat with “dead zone” , control of heating and protection against freezing, box for outdoor use with single thermostat for regulation of heating, short sensor is a part of this device, protection degree IP65 as TEV-2 but potentiometer and indication are placed on front panel single exteriors thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments
99 room analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box fl oor analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box room and fl oor (combined) analog thermostat line THERMO
for mounting into a wiring box room digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box fl oor digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box room and fl oor ( combined) digital thermostat line
THERMO for mounting into a wiring box
0 to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
H - 4 %
T- 2.5 °C
-30 °C to +60 °C
(-22 °F to 140 °F)
2%, 3%, 4%
H - 4 %
T- 2.5 °C(36.5 °F) hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) and relative humidity in range 50.. 90%
0 ... 30 % RH
30 ... 60 % RH
60 ... 90 % RH hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH
98
97
97
94
94
94
95
95
95
100
101 valve
# # built -in
+8..+28 °C thermostatic direction valves, temperature regulation
+8..+28°C
96
87
Thermostats line TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)
EAN code
TER-3A
TER-3B
TER-3C
TER-3D
TER-3G
TER-3H
8595188138390
8595188138406
8595188138413
8595188138420
8595188138451
8595188138468
Technical parameters:
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
(according to product type sensitivity)
TER-3
single level
A1-A2
AC/DC 24 - 240V (galvanically unseparated) (AC 50-60Hz)
2 VA
- 15 %; + 10 %
T1 - T1
TER - 3A -30 °C to +10 °C (-22 °F to 50 °F)
TER - 3B 0 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
TER - 3C +30 °C to +70 °C (86 °F to 158 °F)
TER - 3D 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
TER - 3G 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
TER - 3H -15 °C to +45 °C (5 °F to 113 °F) ajustable in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F external, termistor NTC , except for TER-3G (PT100) fl ashing red LED
Hysteresis:
Sensor:
Sensor fault indication:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Switching diff erence:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
5 %
0.5 °C / 32.9 °F
< 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F)
1x NO (AgSnO
2
)
16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
2.5 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
73 g (2.6 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
!
Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) in six ranges
!
It can be used for monitoring temperature e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, liquids, radiators, motors, devices, open spaces, etc.
!
Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring
!
Possibility to set function “heating”/”cooling” ( setting is done by DIP switch)
!
Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity) , switching by potentiometer in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F
!
Choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)
!
It is possible to place sensor directly on terminal block – for temperature monitoring in a switchboard or in its surroundings
!
Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24 -240 V, not galvanically separated
!
Output contact 1x NO - SPST 16 A /250 V AC1
!
Red LED indicates status of output, green LED indicates energization of the device
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol
Function
TEMPERATURE
Un
HEATING
15-18
LED
COOLING
15-18
LED
TEST
15-18
LED
15-18
LED
T1
T1
Function description
A1
A2
18
15
]
]
]
]
Hysteresis
COOL
RUN
COOL
RUN
COOL
RUN
HEAT
TEST
HEAT
TEST
HEAT
TEST short-circuit or sensor disconnection
Connection
sensor
Un
A1 A2
T1 T1
15 18
It is a single but practical thermostat with separated sensor for monitoring temperature. Device is placed in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object, or liquid. Supply is not galvanically separated from sensor. Sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of delivered sensor is 12m/ 29.5´. device has in-built indication of sensor damage, which means that in case of short-circuit or disconnection red LED fl ashes. Thanks to adjustable hysteresis, it is advantageous to regulate width of
.
When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor.
Description
Supply voltage indication
Heating / cooling selection
Temperature adjusting
Hysteresis adjusting
A1 A2
T1 T1
Supply terminals
Sensor terminals
Output indication
Function TEST
Example of an order
Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3A, TER-3B .. or TER-3H) types diff er in temperature range and supply voltage.
15 18
Output contact
88
Thermostats line TER-3 ( E, F )
EAN code
TER-3E
TER-3F
8595188138437
8595188138444
Technical parameters:
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
Hysteresis:
Sensor:
S ensor fault indic. (short-circuit / disconnection):
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Switching diff erence:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
TER-3E TER-3F
single level
A1-A2
AC /DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz)
2 VA
- 15 %; +10 %
T1 - T1
X
0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F) fi xed 1 °C/ 34 °F thermistor NTC in-built flashing red LED
5%
0.5 °C
< 0.1 % / °C
1x NO- SPST (AgSnO
2
)
16A / AC1,10 A / 24 V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
2.5 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5
AWG 12
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
73 g (2.58 oz.) 74 g(2.61 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
!
Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F)
!
It can be used for temperature monitoring e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, iquids, radiators, motors, devices, open spaces, etc
!
Fixed hysteresis at 1 °C / 32 °F
!
TER-3E - choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)
!
TER-3F - sensor is a part of device, serves for monitoring temperature in a switchboard
!
Supply voltage AC /DC 24 - 240 V
!
Output contact 1x NO- SPST 16 A / 250 V AC1
!
Output status is indicated by red LED
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol Connection
external sensor
Un
A1 A2
T1 T1
15 18
Un
A1 A2
15 18
Description
Supply voltage indication
Supply voltage terminals
External sensor
A1 A2
T1 T1 terminal
Output indication
Temperature adjusting
Supply voltage indication
Temperature adjusting
A1 A2
Supply voltage terminals
Output indication
Function
T1
T1
TER-3E, TER-3F
A1
A2
15 18
TEMPERATURE
18
15
Output contacts
TER-3E
15 18
HYSTERESIS=1K
TER-3F
Sensor
Output contacts
Example of an order
Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3E , TER-3F).
Function description
It is a single thermostat for temperature monitoring with separated sensor (except for TER-3F). Device is located in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object or liquid. Supply is not galvanically separated from sensor but sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of sensor cable is 12 m (29.5´). Temperature sensing is decreased by set hysteresis. When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor.
89
2-stage thermostat TER-4
EAN code
TER-4 /230V: 8594030337806
TER-4 /24V: 8594030338148
Technical parameters:
!
Two-state thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in a wide range -40 °C to +110 °C (-40 °F to 230 °F) with a switch for temperature ranges shift and fi ne temperature setting ( high accuracy of setting)
!
It can be used for temperature monitoring in e.g. switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, open spaces, objects, liquids, radiators, etc.
!
2 thermo inputs for sensor NTC 12 kΩ/25 °C (77 °F)
!
Possibility to choose if both thermostats should work independently or dependently (by DIP switch)
!
Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring
!
Possibility to set functions “heating ” /“cooling ” (setting is done by DIP switch)
!
Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity)of switching 0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F) (DIP switch)
!
Choice of external thermo sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)
!
It is possible to place the sensor directly on terminal block – to monitor temperature in a switchboard or in its surroundings
!
Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V galvanically unseparated
!
2 independent output with changeover contacts/ SPDT 16 A /250 V AC1
!
Output status indicated by red LED, faulty status of sensor by yellow LED
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Description
TER-4
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperatue ranges:
(set via switch individually for each level) double thermostat
A1-A2
AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated, AC/DC 24V
max. 4.5 VA
-40 to -25 °C/ -40 to 77 °F
-25 to -10 °C/ 77 to 50 °F
-10 to +5 °C/ 50 to 41 °F
+ 5 to+20 °C/ 41 to 70 °F
+20 to+35 °C/ 70 to 95 °F
- 15 %; + 10 %
T1-T1 a T2-T2
+35 to +50 °C/ 95 to 122 °F
+50 to +65 °C/122 to 149 °F
+65 to +80 °C/149 to 176 °F
+80 to +95 °C/176 to 203 °F
+95 to +110 °C/203 to 230°F
0-15 °C, in selected range adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch) adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch) termistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F) yellow LED
Function: dependent /independent
Supply voltage indication
Output contact-relay 1
Sensor failure
Output contact-relay 2
Adjusting temperature range
Symbol
Function
Connection
Function of thermostat:
HEATING/COOLING
(inverts output)
Adjusting hysteresis for T1
Adjusting hysteresis for T2
Temperature adjusting T1
Temperature adjusting T2
Temperature adjusting fi ne
Fine temperature setting:
Hysteresis for T1:
Hysteresis for T2:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
5 %
0.5 °C / 32.9 °F
< 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F)
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)16A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A /< 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
red LED
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
- 20.. +55 °C
- 30.. +70 °C
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
238 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
T1
T1
T2
T2
Un
T1
15-18 head
15-18 cool
Chart information:
A1
A2
Un –supply voltage
16
18
26 28
15 25
Un
T2
25-28
T1
15-18 no blocking
15-18 blocking
Un
A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2
16 15 18 28 25 26
Independent function Dependent function
T1 –set temperature of thermostat 1
T2 –set temperature of thermostat 2
H1 –set hysteresis of thermostat 1
H2 –set hysteresis of thermostat 2
15-18 output contact of thermostat 1
25-28 output contact of thermostat 2
H1
H1
Blocking function:
H2
H1
When DIP switch 4 is in position ON, condition for thermostat switching is switching output 15-18 at both individual thermostats ( series function). Thus it is possible to use e.g. fi rst thermostat as operational and the other as an emergency one.
Output 25-28 functions normally , according to T2.
H2
H1
This device includes 2 thermostats in one. Thermostat has 2 thermo inputs, 2 outputs and individual temperature setting. It off ers two possibilities of use. Firstly it can be used as two individual thermostats
(e.g. for monitoring two temperature levels of one device or as a control of individual devices), secondly it is possible to set depending function of both thermostats, when thermostat 2 blocks thermostat
No.1 Advantage of this thermostats is a wide temperature range - 40.. +110 °C (in one device) with very good mechanical accuracy of setting. It is due to 10-state switch for thermo ranges and its scale by 15 °C(59 °F) . VIt is possible to use fi ne tuning by potentiometer by 0-15 °C(32-59 °F) with accuracy ±1 °C/ 34 °F . Device has in-built control of sensor fault ( yellow LED). It is possible to set hysteresis
0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F).
It is possible to operate the thermostat only with one sensor. In that case it is necessary to connect a resistor 10 kΩ to the other input. This is a part of delivery.
90
Thermostat for monitoring temperature of motor winding TER-7
EAN code
TER-7: 8595188137164
Technical parameters:
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Cold sensor resistance:
Upper level:
Botton level:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Accuracy in repetition:
Switching diff erence:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
TER-7
monitoring temperature of motor winding
A1-A2
AC/ DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz) max. 2 VA
-15 %; +10 %
!
It monitors temperature in range of PTC thermistor
!
Fixed levels of switching
!
PTC sensor is used for sensing, It is in-built in motor winding by its manufacturer
!
MEMORY function - active by DIP switch
!
RESET of faulty state: a) button on the front panel b) by external contact (remote by two wires)
!
Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring, red LED fl ashing indicates faulty sensor
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A /250 V AC1
!
Red LED shines and indicates exceeded temperature
!
Terminals of sensor are galvanically separated, they can be shorted out by terminal PE without damaging the device
!
Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24-240 V
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Description
Supply terminals
Output contacts
Supply voltage indication
A1 A2
25 26 28
Faulty states indication
MEMORY function
Function TEST
Ta-Tb
50 Ω - 1.5 kΩ
3.3 kΩ
1.8 kΩ
PTC temperature of motor winding blinking red LED
RESET button
< 5%
± 5 %
< 0.1 % / °C
15 16 18
Output contacts
Ta R Tb
2x changeover/DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
10 A /< 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
3x10
7
0.7x10
5
Symbol Connection
Terminals for sensor and reset
A1 16 18 26 28
A1 A2
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 AWG (12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
83 g (2.9 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Ta
Tb
R
PTC
A2 15 25
25 26 28
15 16 18
Ta R Tb
PTC
Note
Sensors could be in series in abide with conditions in technical specifi cation - switching limit.
Warning!: In case of supply from the main, neutral wire must be connected to terminal A2.
∞ Ω
Ω
3.3
Ω
1.8
Ω
Ω
Ω
red LED
memory
PTC / TK
The device controls temperature of motor winding with PTC thermistor which is mostly placed in motor winding or very close to it. Resistance of PTC thermistor run to max 1.5 kΩ in cold stage.
By temperature increase the resistance goes strongly up and by overrun the limit of 3.3 kΩ the contact of output relay switch off - mostly contactor controlling a motor. By temperature decrease and thereby decrease of thermistor resistance under 1.8 kΩ the output contact of relay again switches on. The relay has function “Control of sensor fault“. This controls interruption or disconnection of sensor.When switch is in position “TK” monitoring of faulty sensor is not functional - it is possibel to connect bimetal sensor with only 2 states: ON or OFF. The device can work with bi-metal sensor in this position.
Other safety unit is function “Memory”. By temperature overrun (and output switches off ) the output is hold in faulty stage until service hit.
This bring the relay to normal stage (with RESET button) on front panel or by external contact (remote).
91
TER-9
EAN code
TER-9/230V: 8595188124478
TER-9/24V: 8595188129190
Technical parameters:
Supply
Number of function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
Hysteresis (sensitivity):
Diference temperature:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Min. switching interval:
Data stored for:
Program circuit
Number of memory places:
Program:
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
92
15 16 18 25 26 28
INNOVATION!
TER-9
6
A1 - A2
AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated,
AC/DC 24V galvanically unseparated max. 4 VA
-15 %; +10 %
CR 2032 (3V)
T1-T1 and T2-T2
-40.. +110 °C in an adjustable range 0.5.. 5 °C
adjustable 1.. 50 °C termistor NTC 12 kΩ při 25 °C displayed on the LCD
!
Digital thermostat with 6 functions and built-in time switch clock with day, week and year program.
!
You can also limit temperature functions and courses this way in real time.
Complex control of home and water heating, solar heating, etc.
!
Two thermostats in one, two temperature inputs, two outputs with dry contact
!
Maximum universal and variable thermostat including all ordinary thermostat functions
!
Functions: two independent thermostats, dependent thermostat, diff erential thermostat, two level thermostat, zone-based thermostat, dead zone thermostat
!
Program setting of output functions, calibration of sensors according to reference temperature (off set)
!
!
!
The thermostat is subject to the digital clock programs
Wide operating range of temperature settings, the possibility of measuring in
0
C and
0
F
Clear display of set and measured data on a backlit LCD
!
Power supply: AC 230V or 24V AC/DC (based on type of device)
!
The time switch clock has a battery backup, which retains data in case of a power outage (reserve backup time - up to 3 years)
!
Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required
!
Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A / 250 V AC1 for each output
!
2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol
Connection
Un
T1
T1
T2
T2
A1
°C
A2
16 18 26 28
15 25
Description of visual elements on the display
A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2
15 16 18 25 26 28
5 %
< 0.5 °C
< 0.1 % / °C
1x changeover for each input/SPDT, (AgNi)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 30 V DC symbol ON/OFF
Displaying the day
Status indication (1st channel)
Status indication (2nd channel)
Display of date / temperature
1 and 2 of setting menu
Time display
Control button PRG+
Reset
TER-9
Auto + t Prog Man
Operation mode indication
Displays 12/24 hour mode
Indication of the switching program
Control button MAN2 / ESC
1x10 7
1x10 5
Control button MAN1 / -
Control button OK up to 3 year max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C
1 min min. 10 years
Device description
Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2)
Sensor-Terminal 1
Sensor-Terminal 2
100 daily, weekly, yearly
LCD display, with back light
Backlight display
-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (power supply - output) any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 20 terminals, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm
(230V) 127 g (24V) 120 g
EN 61812-1. EN 61010-1. EN 60730-2-9; EN 60730-1; EN 60730-2-7
Lead-sealing point
Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery
Output - Channel 1(15-16-18)
Auto
TER-9
RESET
MAN 2
PRG +
MAN
_
ESC
OK
15 16 18 25 26 28
Control buttons
Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28)
Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
2 independent single-stage thermostats
Heating functions
T1 dy1
Ts1 dy2
15-18
Heating functions dy1 dy2
H1
H1
T2 dy1
Ts2 dy2
25-28 dy1 dy2
H2
H2
Depending functions of 2 thermostats
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2
T1 - adjusted temperature T1
T2 - adjusted temperature T2
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1 - set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (for T1)
25-28 output contact (for T2)
T2
Ts2 dy1
25-28
T1
15-18
15-18
Ts1 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy2 dy1 dy2
H2
H2
H2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy1 dy2
H1
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2
T1 - adjusted temperature T1
T2 - adjusted temperature T2
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking
25-28 output contact (for T2)
15-18 output contact (intersection T1 and T2)
Diff erential thermostat
Ts1
D
Ts2
D-H1
D dy1
15-18
25-18 dy1 dy2
2-stage thermostat
T1
D
Ts
T dy1
15-18 dy2
25-28 dy1 dy1dy2
D-H2 dy2
D dy1
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature T1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature T2
D - adjusted diff erence dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (for T1)
25-28 output contact (for T2) dy2 dy1 dy2
H1
H1
H1
H2
H2
H2 dy1
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
D - adjusted diff erence
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - T=T1-D dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact
25-28 output contact
15-18
25-28
Thermostat with “WINDOW”
Ts
T1
D dy1 dy1 dy2 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy2
H1
H1
H1
H2
H2
H2
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
T2 - adjusted temperature T=T1-D
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact
25-28 output contact
Thermostat with dead zone
D
T1
15-18
25-28
Ts dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1
H1
H1
H1
H2
H2
H2
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
T2- T=T1-D
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (heating)
25-28 output contact (cooling)
Classic function of thermostat, output contact switched until adjusted temperature is reached. Hysteresis eliminates frequent switching - output oscillation.
Output 15-18 is closed, if temperature of both thermostats is bellow an adjusted level.
When any thermostat reaches adjusted level, the contact 15-18 opens.
Serial inner connection of thermostats (logic function AND).
Switching of output corresponds with input, which has lower temperatures when diff ference is exceeded.
Diff erencial thermostat is used for keeping two identical temperature e.g. in heating systems (boiler and reservoir), solar systems (collector - reservoir, exchanger), water heating (water heater, water distribution)etc.
Typical example of use for two-stage thermostat is e.g in boiler-room, where there are two biolers from which one is main and the other one is auxiliary. The main boiler is managed according to set temperature and auxiliary boiler is switched in case temperature falls under set diff erence. Thus it helps to the main boiler in case outside temperature dramatically falls.
In the range of set diff erence (D) output 15-18 functions as normal thermostat to input
1 (type 1). In case temperature falls under set diff erence, second output switches too.
Output is closed (heating) only if temperature is within adjusted range. If temperature is out of range, the contact opens. T is set as T1-D.
The function is used for protection of gutters against freezing.
In case of thermostat with a „dead zone“ , it is possible to set temperature T1 and a diff erence (respectively a width of dead zone D). If temperature is higher than T1, output contact of cooling switches ON; if the temperature gets bellow T1, the contact switches
OFF.
If the temperature gets bellow temperature T, the contact of heating switches ON and it switches OFF when temperature T is exceeded. This function can be used for example for automatic air warming and cooling in ventilation so the sit is always within the range
T1 and T.
93
Room and fl oor analog thermostat Thermo
Ø 65mm
!
ATR - Analog Thermo Room:
!
Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F) with a built-in sensor
ATF - Analog Thermo Floor:
Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) with external sensor
Function „temporary temperature change“ in range ±10 °C (decreasing / increasing temperature)
!
ATC - Analog Thermo Combined:
Room and fl oor thermostat, sensors are connected in series and block each other
Function „temporary temperature change“ , fi x -5 °C /+23 °F (night decline)
Temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) for both sensors, adjustable separately
It is possible to use it without external sensor
EAN code - DEVICE:
ATR : 8595188125000
ATF : 8595188130165
ATC : 8595188130172
EAN code - COMPLET:
ATR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136228
ATF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135870
ATC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135887
To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except ATR)
!
ATR, ATF, ATC
Night decline is activated by a pushbutton on device or external contact (only ATR)
Night decline setting is done by an auxiliary button 2(under main button, only ATR/ATF)
Ofset setting (calibration ±10 °C/ 50 °F) with „known“ thermometer.
External sensor (TC-3, 3m / 9.84’) is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m/ 328’
Design ELEGANT*, wide range of colors, possibility to combine more frames together
Technical parameters:
ATR ATF ATC
Description
Supply
Power supply and tolerance:
Consumption, frequency:
Measuring
Temperature range:
Accuracy:
Hysteresis:
Temperature sensor:
Night decline:
Off set/calibration:
Setting
Room temperature setting:
Floor temperature setting:
Off set setting:
Night decline setting:
Night decline switching:
Display
Power supply indication:
Output ON indication:
Night decline indication:
Indication of faulty fl oor sensor:
AC 230 V ±10 %,
6.5 VA/ 50-60 Hz
+5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F) +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F)
±2 °C/ 36 °F
±1 °C/ 34 °F
room fl oor room + fl oor
adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F adj. ±10 °C/50 °F fi x - 5 °C/ 41 °F
adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F adj. ± 10 °C/50 °F
main knob auxiliary button 1
auxiliary button 2 x
internal / external internal pushbutton green LED 1 red LED 1
red / orange LED 2 red LED 2
Auxiliary button 1*
Main knob
Main switch
Supplyvolatge and output indication
Wiring box
Supply cable
* Auxiliary button 1 and 2 are accessible after removal of the main knob
Connection
ATR
Auxiliary button 2*
Indication of night decline
Night decline push-button
Standart jumper L-15
(remove when potential-free contact is used)
Indication- exceeded temp./ext. sensor:
Output
Type:
Max. loadability:
Contact separation:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
x LED 1 fl ashing potential-free contact NO, material of contact - AgNi
16A/250 V, 4000 VA for AC1 galvanic
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
-20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F)
4kV wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝
IP30 in standard conditions solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12)
84 x 89 x 56.4 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.22˝ )
110 g (3.9 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
ATF
ATC
L 15 18
N
If potential-free contact is used
Design
Complete off er of switching devices line ELEGANT can be found in an individual catalogue ELEGANT Home switches, which can be sent to you upon request.
L
N
Accessories:
See page 102
94
Digital room and fl oor thermostat Thermo
Ø 65mm
!
DTR - Digital Thermo Room:
Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with a built-in sensor
!
DTF - Digital Thermo Floor:
Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with external sensor
!
DTC - Digital Thermo Combined:
Combined thermostat with room and fl oor sensors and temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F )
Choice of temperature display from internal or external sensors
By program it is possible to choose,which sensor is active and if it should function in serial or in parallel
Adjusting
Min. temperature cycle:
Min. time cycle:
Number of programs:
Number of events:
Off set/calibration:
Display
LCD display:
Displaynig date:
Output indication:
Output
Type:
Max.loadability:
Contact separation:
Mechanical life:
Elektrical life:
Other information
Operating position:
Storing position:
Electical strenght:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
DTF, DTC
EAN code - DEVICE:
DTR : 8595188125017
DTF : 8595188135924
DTC : 8595188135931
EAN code - COMPLET:
DTR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136235
DTF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135863
DTC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135856
To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except DTR)
External sensor (TC-3,3m)is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m(328’)
Monitoring of disconnection or short-circuit of external sensor, fault is displayed
Technical parameters
DTR DTF DTC
Other Funktions DTR, DTF, DTC
Supply
Power supply and tolerance:
Consumption, frequency:
Backup:
Measuring
Temperature range:
Accuracy:
Hysteresis:
Temperature sensor:
AC 230V ±15%,
1.5 VA, 50-60 Hz rechargable accumulator LIR2032 (40mAh) charging time from 0 to 100%: 3 hours backup time when capacity is 100% 72 hours
+5 to +50 °C ( +41 to +122 °C )
± 0.5 °C / 0.5 °C (± 32.9 °C / 32.9 °C) adjustable 0.5 °C or 1 °C /32.9 or 33.8
°C
room (internal) and
room (internal) fl oor (external) fl oor (external)
- programs are pre-set according to most frequently used functions =„Plug and Play “
- pushbutton lock to prevent unwanted manipulation with thermostat
- choice of display current/set temperature
- „freezing protection“ in case temperature drops below +50 °C (+122 °F) thermostat always switches heating on
- choice of function heating or cooling
- easy and intuitive control by four push-buttons
- automatic shift summer/winter time
- holiday mode -it is possible to set temperature and time from 1 hour to 99 days without any
intervention into program settings or turning heating off (suitable in case of planned absence
holiday...)
- modern desing in Elegant line of wall switch buttons, combinations with many colors and
multiframes are possible
Description of visual elements on the display
0.5 °C (32.9
°F)
10 min.
4; pre- set program 1
2- 6 in a program adjustable ±0.5 °C (32.9
°F)
26x24 mm, with backlight (ON or OFF pernamently) current time, set/ current temperature, day in a week, output status red LED and symbol on LCD potential- free contact NO - SPST, material of contact - AgNi (Silver Allow)
16A/250V, 4000VA by AC1 galvanic, electrical strength 4kV
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-10 °C to +55 °C ( +14 °F to +131°F)
-20 °C to +70 °C ( -4 °F to +158°F)
4kV
IP30 in standard conditions wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝ solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12)
84 x 89 x 54.3 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.14 ˝ )
120 g (0.26oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Program mode
Operational mode
Time setting
Manual mode
(permanent/temporary)
External sensor
Description
Connection
DTR
16 A/ 4000VA
250 VμAC1
Output indication
Display
Controlling buttons
Reset
Wiring box
Supply cable
DTF
DTC
Day of the week
AM/PM
Holliday mode
Temperature display
15 18 L
16 A/ 4000VA
250 VμAC1
N
N
Program events
Design
L
N
L
N
Complete off er of switching devices line ELEGANT can be found in an individual catalogue ELEGANT Home switches, which can be sent to you upon request.
Accuracy:
See page 102
95
Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1
NEW!
!
This energy-saving digital radiator thermostat is a programmable regulation device for various heaters,
but mainly radiators
!
It can be used to regulate temperature in closed rooms, thus helping to lower heat energy consumption;
Functions:
Manual mode - measuring and checking a manually set temperature
Automatic mode - control between two temperatures based on a set time program:
- comfort temperature (factory setting 21°C)
- energy-saving temperature (factory setting 16°C)
!
!
Intervals of heating and energy-saving operation can be set using a freely adjustable time program.
8 individually programmable switching times per day:
!
!
- 4 heating intervals
- 4 energy-saving intervals
The device features very quiet operation and long battery life (up 5 years)
Quick and easy installation
EAN code
ATV-1
USB programming adapte
8595188160889
8595188160995
Technical parameters:
Operating voltage:
Temperature range:
Color:
Dimensions (L x W x H):
Design:
ATV-1
3 V / DC (2 AA batteries 1.5 V / DC AA)
+ 8.. +28 °C
White
76.5 x 53.5 x 63 mm
Thermostatic direction valves, electronic
Examples of daily heating program:
BATHROOM
21 °C
21 °C
saving saving saving saving saving
8:00 - 9:00 10:30 - 12:00 16:00 - 17:00 20:00 - 21:30
LIVING ROOM
21 °C
21 °C
saving saving
9:00 - 10:00
Setting for ATV-1:
- manual
- via USB programming adapter PROGmatic
Using the programming port, in seconds your settings will be transferred into the thermostat.
17:00 - 20:30
saving
Other functions
1. Time function - the desired temperature can be set for a certain adjustable time interval
2. Vacation function - while you‘re gone, you can set and maintain the desired temperature
3. Open window function - when the temperature drops, the heating valve automatically closes in order to save energy
4. Child safety block - blocking against undesired interference with the thermostat
5. Freeze protection - if the temperature drops below 6 °C, the valve opens until the temperature again exceeds 8 °C. This keeps heaters from freezing.
Description of device
1
2
3
02
Mo Di
61
Mi
:
21
Do Fr
8
Sa
4
So
AUTO
MANU
4
5
1. Display
2. Increase temperature
3.Button MENU
4. Button - timer function
5. Decrease temperature
6. OK button - confi rm settings
6
Adapters
Type of valve
Heimeier, Junkers Landys+Gyr, MNG,
Honeywell, Braukmann thread size M 30x1,5
Danfoss RAV
(the valve plunger must be fi tted with the enclosed pin)
Danfoss RA
Type of adapter
No adapter necessary
+ enclosed pin; only for RAV
Package content
Package content
Danfoss RAVL
Thermostat
Adapters
Instruction manual
96
Thermostats TEV-2, TEV-3
TEV-2 TEV-3
EAN code
TEV-2: 8595188129251
TEV-3: 8595188129268
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature ranges:
Hysteresis (sensitivity):
Sensor:
Faulty sensor indication:
Accuracy
Accuracy of settings (mechanical):
Dependance on temperature:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operation temperature:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Polution level:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
TEV-2
one-level thermostat
L - N
230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz max. 2.5 VA
±15%
TEV-3
T- T
-20 to +20 °C / -4 °F to +68 °F +5 to+35 °C/ +41 °F to +95 °F
3 °C (± 1.5 °C) / 37,4 °F (± 34.7 °F) thermistor NTC 12 kΩ red LED flashing
5 %
< 0.1 % / °C
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384W / DC
30 A/ < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24V DC
500 mW red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-30 to +50 °C (-22 °F to 122°F) any
IP 65
III.
2 solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12)
110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33˝x 5.3˝x 2.3˝)
266 g (9.38 oz.) 277 g(9.77 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
!
Single thermostat with possibility of temperature management in adjustable range (it is possible to modify this range or make a special one on request)
!
Used to regulate heating (or cooling) in demanding environments (outside , humidity, dustiness, etc.)
!
Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which enables installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0
!
TEV-2 - control and indication elements are placed under transparent cover
!
TEV-3 - control and indication elements are placed directly on the cover (for easy orientation and frequent change of temperature)
!
Thermostat status is indicated by LED (2 colours)
!
Function of monitoring sensor disconnection and short-circuit
!
Output changeover /SPDT contact 16A(AC-1)
T
T
Symbol
PG11
L
N
V1 V2
L
Connection
Function heating
Description TEV-2 (without cover)
PG11
Opening for incoming cables
Description TEV-3 (cover)
PG9
SENSOR NTC
Function cooling
SENSOR NTC
Device status indication
Temperature setting
Terminal for sensor
Terminals for connection of supply voltage and output contact
Sensor
Device status indication
Function TEV-2,TEV-3
Hysteresis
Sensor failure
Temperature setting
V1
LED red
LED green
TEV-2 and TEV-3 are universal single thermostats for universal use. In case ambient temperature is higher than set temperature relay is open (function HEATING), for cooling function (opposite function) is possible to use NC contact of relay (V2).
PG11 PG11
Opening for incoming cables
PG9
Sensor
97
Thermostat TEV-1
EAN code
TEV-1: 8595188129121
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature ranges:
thermostat 1
thermostat 2
Hysteresis (sensitivity):
Sensor:
Faulty sensor indication:
Accuracy
Accuracy of settings (mechanical):
Dependance on temperature:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity::
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Two-level thermostat with function “WINDOW” meaning that output is switched in case the measured temperature is within set range ( adjustable in range -20.. +20 °C/ -4 °F to +68 °F)
!
Used as protection against freezing ( water-shoots, pavements, drives, pipes, etc.) heating is on when temperature falls under set upper level (e.g.+5 °C/ +41 °F) and off in case it falls under lower level (e.g.-10 °C /-50 °F , when heating is not able eff ectively operate)
!
Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which allows installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0
!
Thermostat status is indicated by LED (3colors) under transparent cover
!
Function monitoring short-circuit and sensor disconnection (break)
TEV-1
two-level thermostat
L - N
230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz max. 2.5 VA
±15 %
T - T
-20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F)
-20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F)
3
°C
(± 1.5
°C
) thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F ) red LED flashing
5 %
< 0.1 % / °C
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
LED
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-30 °C to +50 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F) any
IP 65
III.
2 solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12)
110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33 ˝x 5.3 ˝x 6.6 ˝)
238 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
!
Output changeover contact 16A/ SPDT (AC-1)
Symbol Connection
Function heating
T
T
Function
L
N
Description
V1 V2
L
V1
LED red
LED green
LED orange
Un
T1
T2
V1 L V2 N N
SENSOR NTC
T1
T1
Function cooling
Hysteresis
Sensor failure
SENSOR NTC
Device status indication
Bottom temperature setting
Upper temperature
Terminal for sensor connection
Terminals for connection of supply voltage and output contact
Description of function
TEV-1 is a double thermostat designated for system of protection of roof water- shoots against freezing. The device is placed in a waterproof box (IP65), sensor with double insulation,which is a part of the device, senses ambientrature. The device operates as zonal thermostat with independent setting of upper and bottom operational temperature. In case the ambient temperature is higher than T1 (upper temperature), thermostat switches heating of watershoots off (icing melts down). In case the ambient temperature is lower than T2 (bottom temperature), thermostat also switches heating off (to big freezing heating cannot manage to melt the ice).
PG11 PG11
Opening for incoming cables
PG9
Sensor
98
Thermostat TEV-4
153x62x34
IP65
EAN code
TEV-4: 8595188140577
Technical parameters:
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Input (apparent/loss):
Function
Function - :
Function - :
Temperature setting
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Slight temperature setting:
Hysteresis:
Hysteresis setting:
Output
Output contact:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Suggested power-supply cable:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
Actual temperature level
Setup temperature level
!
Single point thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments (humid and contaminated, agressive and defective, industrial workshops, washing rooms, green-houses, cellars and cooling boxes…)
!
External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall
!
Built-in thermo-sensor is integrated in the device
!
Two fuctions adjustable by jumper: heating and cooling
!
3 adjustable (by jumper) ranges of temperature, and fi ne adjustment through potentiometer
!
3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis
!
Supply voltage 230 V AC
!
Potentialless NO- SPST contact 12A AC1 switching
TEV-4
L - N
AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz
- 15% .. +10% max. 6VA / 0.7W
setting by jumper J3 cooling heating
by jumper J2
-30 °C to 0 °C (-22 °F to 32 °F)
0 °C to +30 °C (32 °F to 86 °F)
+ 30 °C to +60 °C (86 °F to 140 °F) potentiometer
0.5 / 1.5 / 4 °C (32.9 °F/ 34.7 °F/ 39.2 °F) by jumper J1
1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO
2
)
12 A / AC1
3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3 x 10 7
0.7 x 10 5
-30 °C to +65 °C (-22 °F to 149 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV (supply-output)
sensor-side down
IP65
III.
2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)
153 x 62 x 34 mm ( 6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1˝)
148 g (5.2 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1
Description (proportion is accordant to real size)
Cable gommet M16x1.5
for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝
Hole for mounting on the wall
Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
Connection
L
N jumper for L potential
TEV-4
0.5
1.5
4
L
15
J1
Hysteresis
(°C)
18
L
N
J2
Adjustable range
setting (°C)
J3
Function
cooling
heating
-30 .. 0
0 .. 30
30 .. 60
Slight setup fi nish in the frame of range
N
L potentialless
NO contacts
Hole for mounting on the wall
Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
Temperature sensor
L
15
18
L
N
L
15
18
L
N adjustable hysteresis
3- wire connection 4- wire connection
L - N
Function heat
15 - 18
Function cool
15 - 18
Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection).
For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting.
99
Hygro-thermostat RHT-1
EAN code
RHT-1: 8595188137263
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Input:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Temperature range:
Humidity range:
Temperature hysterisis:
Humidity hysterisis:
Sensor: internal
Indication of sensor´s fault:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Long-term stability of humidity:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switched output:
Switched voltage:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operational position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity (mm
2
):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
T
RH
A1
A2
15
18
RHT-1
hygro-thermostat
A1 - A2
1VA
24-240V AC / DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
-15%; +10%
!
Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90%
!
Possibility of setting of up to 8 conditions for contact switching and function permanently ON/OFF
!
Sensor is a part of the device - designated for measuring in switchboards
!
Function of sensor control (damage, disturbances...)
!
Fixed setting of temperature hysteresis at 2.5 °C / 36.5 °F and humidity at 4%
!
Output state is indicated by red LED
!
Supply voltage AC/DC 24-240 V
!
Output contact 1x NO/ SPDT 16A/250 V AC1
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Device description:
15 18
TOP
Output contacts
Ventilative upper oppenings
Output indication
Indication of supply voltage
Function setting
Temperature setting
0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
50.. 90%
2.5 °C / 36.5 °F
4%
internal red LED fl ashing
Humidity setting
5% typical < 0.8% / year
Ventilative lower opennings
1x NO/SPDT (AgSnO
2
)
16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300W / DC
250V AC1 / 24V DC red LED shines
3x10 7
0.7x10
5
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F )
2.5 kV (supply-output) vertical, with correct orientation
DIN rail EN 60715
IP40 from front panel, IP10 on terminals
III.
2 max. 2x2:5, max. 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
69 g (2.4 oz. )
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Connection
15 18
Funcions:
Choice of function
G
H
E
F
C
D
A
B
ON
OFF
A2 A1
Supply voltage terminals
T > Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
T < Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
Relay switched under the following conditions or or or or a a a a relay permanently ON relay permanently OFF
RH > RHset
RH > RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH > RHset
RH > RHset
-
A2 A1
Un
+
Description of functon:
This device is designated for monitoring of parameters of environment (meaning temperature and relative humidity) in switchboards. It enables setting of eight conditions of constact closing and therefore it is usable for various types of load (e.g. fans, heating, air-conditioning, dehydrating units...). While installing it is neccessary to take into account the fact that hysterisis rises by persistence of measured values between sensor and ambient environment. The device is equipped by sensor fault detection. In case of sensor fault, exceeding allowed limits (for temperature -30°C/ -22 °F and +80°C/ 176 °F; for humidity 5% and 95%) or in case of faulty internal communcation higher than 50% ( due to e.g. high ambient disturbances) contact opens and sensor fault is indicated. Sensor fault doesn´t have infl uence on function permanently ON or pemanently OFF.
Note: In case the conditions for switching are not applied, relay is open.
100
Hygrostat RHV-1
153x62x34
IP65
!
Single hygrostat is used for regulation of humidity in harsh environments (washdown, greenhouse, refrigeration)
!
External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall
!
Built-in hygro-sensor is integrated in the device
!
Two functions adjustable by jumper: moisting and drying
!
3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis
!
Supply voltage 230V AC
!
NO contact closure 12A/AC1
EAN code
RHV-1: 8595188140584
Technical parameters:
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input voltage range:
Input (apparent/loss):
Setting function
Function - :
Function - :
Set. the scale of relative humidity:
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Slight setting of relative humidity:
Hysteresis
Hysteresis setting:
Output
Output contact:
Current rating:
Switching output:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm 2 ):
Suggested power-supply cable:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Function
Actual humidity level
Setup relative humidity level
RHV-1
Description (proportion is accordant to real size)
L - N
AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz
- 15% .. +10% max. 6VA /0.7W
Setting function Jumper J3 moistening drying
Humidity setting Jumper J2
0 ... 30 % RH
30 ... 60 % RH
60 ... 90 % RH
Relative Humidity Setting Potentiometer
2, 3, 4 % from setup rate
Jumper J1
1 x NO-SPST (AgSnO
2
)
12 A / AC1
3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3 x 10
7
0.7 x 10 5
Cable gommet M16x1.5
for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝
-30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV (supply-output) sensor-side down
IP65
III.
2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5( AWG 12)
CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)
153 x 62 x 34 mm (6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝)
148 g (5.2 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1
Hole for mounting on the wall
Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
Connection
L
N jumper for L potential
RHV-1
L
15
L
N
2
3
4
J1
Hysteresis
(% from value)
18
J2
Adjustable range
setting (%RH)
J3
Function
drying
moistening
0 .. 30
30 .. 60
60 .. 90
Slight setup fi nish in the frame of range
N
L potentialless
NO- SPST contacts
L
15
18
L
N
L
15
18
Adjustable hysteresis
3- wire connection
Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
Humidity sensor
4- wire connection
L
N
L - N
Function moistens
15 - 18
Function drying
15 - 18
Device is supplied with a standard jumper.
For the device to operate correctly, it must be mounted with the sensor side down.
101
Temperature sensors TC, TZ, PT100 - Accessories to Thermostats
TC TZ PT100
EAN code
TC-0
TC-3
TC-6
TC-12
TZ-0
TZ-3
TZ-6
TZ-12
PT100-3
PT100-6
PT100-12
8595188110075
8595188110617
8595188110082
8595188110099
8595188140591
8595188110600
8595188110594
8595188110587
8595188136136
8595188136143
8595188136150
!
!
!
Thermister temperature sensors are made of Negative Temperature Co-effi cient (NTC) embedded in a PVC or metal sleeve with a thermally-conductive sealer
Sensor TC - lead-in cable to sensor TC is made of wire CYSY 2Dx0.5 mm/ 0.02”
Sensor TZ - cable VO3SS-F 2Dx0.5mm /0.02” with silicone insulation for use in high
temperature applications
- silicone insulation for use in high temperature applications
Sensor PT100 - shielded silicon 2x0.22 mm
2
(AWG 21), shielding connected with a case
!
Weight of sensors TC: Weight of sensors TZ: Weight of sensors PT100:
- TC-0 - 5 g (0.2 oz.)
- TC-3 - 108 g (3.8 oz.)
- TC-6 - 213 g (7.5 oz.)
- TC-12 - 466 g (16.4 oz.)
- TZ-0 - 4.5 g (0.16 oz.)
- TZ-3 - 106 g (3.74 oz.)
- TZ-6 - 216 g (7.6 oz.)
- TZ-12 - 418g (14.7 oz.)
- PT100-3 - 68 g (2.4 oz.)
- PT100-6 - 149 g (5.3 oz.)
- PT100-12 - 249 g (8.8 oz.)
Technical parameters
Range:
Scanning element:
In air/ in water:
In air/ in water:
Cable material:
Terminal material:
Protection degree:
TC TZ PT100
0 °C to +70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
NTC 12K 5 %
(τ65) 92 s / 23 s
(τ95) 306 s / 56 s
High temperature PVC
High temperature PVC
IP 67
-40 °C to +125 °C (-40 °F to 257 °F)
NTC 12K 5 %
(τ65) 62 s / 8 s
(τ95) 216 s / 23 s
Silicone
Nickel plated copper
IP 67
-30 °C to +200 °C (-22 °F to 392 °F)
PT 100
(τ0.5) - / 7 s
(τ0.9) - / 19 s
Silicone
Copper
IP 67
τ65 (95): time, which sensor needs to heat up on 65 (95) % of ambient temperature of environment, in which is located
Resistive values of sensors in dependance on temperature
Temperature ( 0 C/
20 / 68
30 / 86
40 / 104
50 / 122
60 / 140
70 / 158
0 F ) Sensor NTC (kΩ)
14.7
9.8
6.6
4.6
3.2
2.3
Sensor PT100 (Ω)
107.8
111.7
115.5
119.4
123.2
127.1
Tolerance of sensor NTC 12 kΩ is ± 5% by 25
0
C/ 77
0
F .
Long-term resistence stability by sensor PT100 is 0.05% (10 000 hours)
TC: Temperature sensors for range 0 °C to +70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
TC-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal block (sensor length 110 mm/4.33")
TC-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´)
TC-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´)
TC-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´)
PT-100: Temperature sensor for range -30 °C to +200 °C (-22 °F to 392 °F)
PT100-3 -Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´), double isolation silicone
PT100-6 -Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´), double isolation silicone
PT100-12 -Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´), double isolation silicone
Sensor drawing
TC
8.2 mm
0.3˝
TZ
6.2 mm
0.2˝
20 mm/ 0.8˝
22.65 mm/ 0.9˝
TZ: Temperature sensors for range -40 °C to +125 °C (-40 °F to 257 °F)
Diagramm of sensor warm up via air
TZ-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal block (lenght of sensor 110mm/ 4.33˝)
TZ-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´)
TZ-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´)
TZ-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´)
70
60
50
40
PT100
4.6 mm
0.2˝
24 mm / 0.9˝
PVC
Silikon
30
20
10
0
00:00 02:53 05:46
PVC -reaction
to water temperature from 22.5
0 C to 58 0 C
(from 72.5
0
F to 136.4
0
F)
08:38 s [min]
11:31 14:24 17:17
Silicone - reaction to water temperature from 22.5 0 C to 63.5 0 C
(from 72.5 0 F to 144.5 0 F)
Sensor photo
TC TZ
Installation box LKM-45
Recommended installation box for wall mounting of THERMO thermostats
PT100
Type LKM- 45, dimensions: 98x98x45 mm, color: white
EAN code: 8595188130806
102
Installation contactors VS
Installation contactors
VS120
Number of contacts: 1x20 A
Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
10, 01
VS220
Number of contacts: 2x20 A
Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
20, 11, 02
VS420
Number of contacts: 4x20 A
Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
40, 31
VS425
Number of contacts: 4x25 A
Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04
VS440
Number of contacts: 4x40 A
Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04
VS463
Number of contacts: 4x63 A
Konfi gurace spínacích a rozpínacích kontaktů:
40, 31, 22
Installation contactors with manual control VSM
VSM220
Number of contacts: 2x20 A
Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
20, 11, 02
VSM425
Number of contacts: 4x25 A
Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04
Accessories
Auxiliary contacts
VSK
VSK-11
auxiliary contacts:
1x switching,
1x breaking.
VSK-20
auxiliary contacts:
2x switching
Installation spacer
IKV
Module spacer
Contactror‘s loadability and dimensions
x
4
3
2
1 y
103
Installation contactors VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463
!
!
!
!
For switching electric circuits, especially for resistave loads and three-phase induction motors number of contacts VS120: 1 number of contacts VS220: 2 number of contacts VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463: 4
It is produced in confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:
VS120: 10, 01
VS220: 20, 11, 02
VS420: 40, 31
VS425: 40, 31, 22, 04
VS440: 40, 31, 22, 04
VS463: 40, 31, 22
Protection IP 20 - on request we deliver covers that ensure protection IP 40 for all terminals
DIN rail or panel mounting
EAN code
see page 108
Technical parameters
VS120
VS220 VS420 VS425
VS440
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Rated thermo-current l th
(in AC):
Switched operation
AC-1 for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-1 for 230 V:
AC-3 for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-3 for 230 V:
AC-7a for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-7a for 230 V:
AC-7b for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-7b for 230 V:
AC-15 for 400 V, 1 phase:
AC-15 for 230 V, 1 phase:
DC1 U e
= 24 V:
DC1 U e
= 110 V:
DC1 U e
= 220 V:
Loadability of modular contactors see page143
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Electrical life in 230 / 400 V
AC-1- resistive load :
AC-3-power load:
AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:
AC-5b - incandescent lamps :
AC-7a - resistive household devices:
AC-7b - inductive household devices:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:
Electrical strenght:
Contacts - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Maximal torque:
Coil - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Max. torque:
Operating
Coil control voltage:
230 V
20 A x
4 kW, 1 phase x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase x
4 kW, 1 phase x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4 A
6 A
20 A
6 A
0.6 A
600 switch/hr.
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
0.1x10
6 by 30 μF
0.1x10
6 by 2 kW
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm
2
)
6 mm
2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm
2
0.6 Nm
230 V
20 A x
4 kW, 1 phase x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase x
4 kW, 1 phase x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4 A
6 A
20 A
6 A
0.6 A
600switch/hr.
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
0.1x10
6 by 30 μF
0.1x10
6 by 2 kW
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm 2 )
6 mm 2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm 2
0.6 Nm
415 V
20 A
13 kW
7.5 kW, 3 phase
2,2 kW
1.1 kW, 3 phase
13 kW
7.5 kW, 3 phase
2,2 kW
1.1 kW, 3 phase
4 A
6 A
20 A
2 A
0.5 A
600 switch/hr.
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
0.3x10
6
by 36 μF
0.1x10
6 by 2 kW
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm 2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm 2
0.6 Nm
440 V
25 A
16 kW
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW
2.2 kW, 3 phase
16 kW
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW
2.2 kW, 3 phase
4 A
6 A
25 A
6 A
0.6 A
600 switch/hr.
0.2x10
6
0.5x10
6
0.1x10
6 by 36 μF
0.1x10
6 by 2 kW
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
25 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm
2
)
6 mm
2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm
2
0.6 Nm
440 V
40 A
26 kW
16 kW, 3 phase
11 kW
5.5 kW, 3 phase
26 kW
16 kW, 3 phase
11 kW
5.5 kW, 3 phase
4 A
6 A
40 A
4 A
1.2 A
600 switch/hr.
0.1x10
6
0.15x10
6
0.1x10
6
by 220 μF
0.1x10
6
by 4 kW
0.1x10
6
0.15x10
6
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
63 A
2
4 kV
AWG 3 (25 mm 2 )
16 mm 2
3.5 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm 2
0.6 Nm
Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:
Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:
Mounting side-by-side:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Standards:
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.1 VA/2.1 W
2.1 VA/2.1 W max. 2 contactors**
120 g (4.2 oz.)
17.5x85x60 mm
(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.1 VA/2.1 W
2.1 VA/2.1 W max. 2 contactors**
130 g(4.6 oz.)
17.5x85x60 mm
(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
AC 24 V, 48 V
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/1.5 W
30 VA/25 W max. 2 contactors**
170 g(6 oz.)
35x62.5x57 mm
(1.4˝x 2.7˝x 2.24˝)
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.6 VA/2.6 W *
2.6 VA/2.6 W * max. 2 contactors**
213 g(7.5 oz.)
35x85x60 mm
(1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/5 W
5 VA/5 W max. 2 contactors**
400 g(14 oz.)
53.3x84x60 mm
(2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝)
* 3.8 VA/3,8 W for -04 version of contacts
** Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every other contactor. We off er installation spacer of type IKV.
VS463
440 V
63 A
40 kW
24 kW, 3 phase
15 kW
8.5 kW, 3 phase
40 kW
24 kW, 3 phase
15 kW
8.5 kW, 3 phase
4 A
6 A
63 A
4 A
1.2 A
600 switch/hr.
0.1x10
6
0.15x10
6
0.1x10
6
by 330 μF
0.1x10
6
by 5 kW
0.1x10
6
0.15x10
6
≥ 24 V, ≥ 100 mA
80 A
2
4 kV
AWG 3 (25 mm 2 )
16 mm 2
3.5 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm 2
0.6 Nm
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/5 W
5 VA/5 W max. 2 contactors**
400 g (14 oz.)
53.3x84x60 mm
(2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝)
104
Connection
VS120
VS120-10
1 A1 +
2 A2
-
VS120-01
R1
R2
A1 +
A2
-
Photo VS120
Photo VS220
VS220
VS420
VS220-20
1 3
2 4
VS420-40
1 3
2 4
A1
A2
5
6
+
-
7 13
8 14
VS220-11
1 R3
2 R4
A1
A2
A1 +
A2
-
VS420-31
1 3
2 4
VS220-02
R1 R3
R2 R4
5 21
6 22
A1
A2
A1
A2
+
-
Photo
VS420
VS425
VS425-40
1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43 A1
+
VS425-31
1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41 A1
+
VS440
VS463
2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44
VS425-22
1 13 R3 21 R5 31 7 43
2 14 R4 22 R6 32 8 44
VS440-40
1 3 5 7
13
2 4
VS440-22
1 R3
6
R5
8 14
7
2 R4
VS463-40
1 3 5
R6 8
7 (13)
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
A1 +
2 4 6 8 (14) A2
-
Auxiliary contacts for VS425, VS440. VS463 and VSM220, VSM425
Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20
Ambient temperature:
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Electrical strength:
Rated current 230 V (AC 15):
Rated current 400 V (AC 15):
Max. switching frequence:
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Solid/ Stranded conductor (max):
Maximal torque:
Weight:
Dimensions:
-5
0
C to +55
0
C (23
0
F to 131
0
F )
500 V
4 kV
6 A
4 A
6 A
600 sep./hod.
≥ 12 V, ≥ 10 mA
6 A
2.5 mm² (AWG 10)/ 2.5 mm² (AWG 10)
0.8 Nm
10 g (0.35 oz.)
10x85x60 mm (0.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
2
2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42
VS425-04
R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41
R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42
VS440-31
1 3 5 R3
2 4
VS440-04
R1 R3
6 R4
R5 R7
R2 R4
VS463-31
1 3 5
R6 R8
R3
4 6 R4
A1
+
A2
-
A2
-
A1
+
A2
-
A1
+
A2
A1
A2
-
+
-
Photo
VS425
Photo
VS440
Photo
VS463
VS463-22
1 R3 R5
2 R4 R6
Connection of auxiliary contact VSK-11 and VSK-20
EAN code
see paga 108
VSK-11 VSK-20
31 43
32 44
7
8
2 3 33
2 4 3 4
A1
+
A2
-
105
Installation contactors with manual control VSM220, VSM425
!
!
!
!
!
!
Special version of installation contactors with not only basic functions but also with manual control
For switching accumulative appliances for heating and service water warming
Description of individual positions of manual control
AUTO: common function as with installation contactors without manual control
1 - shifting from AUTO to 1: operational contacts are closed and back contacts are open until there is another impulse to a contactor coil
0 - contacts are open (operational contact) or closed (stand-by contact) regardless voltage
Optical indicator: ON-OFF
It is produced in confi guration of making and breaking contacts:
VSM220: 20. 11, 02
VSM425: 40. 31, 22, 04
It is possible to connect auxiliary contacts VSK to contactors VSM220, VSM425
EAN code
see page 122
Technical parameters:
VSM220
VSM425
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Rated thermo-current l th
(in AC):
Switched operation
AC-1 for 400 V:
AC-1 for 230 V:
AC-3 for 400 V:
AC-3 for 230 V:
AC-7a for 400 V:
AC-7a for 230 V:
AC-7b for 400 V:
AC-7b for 230 V:
AC-15 for 400 V:
AC-15 for 230 V:
DC1 U e
= 24 V:
DC1 U e
= 110 V:
DC1 U e
= 220 V:
Loadability of modular contactors see page 147
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Electrical life in 230 / 400 V
AC-1- resistive load :
AC-3-power load:
AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:
AC-5b - incandescent lamps :
AC-7a - resistive household devices:
AC-7b - inductive household devices:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:
Electrical strenght:
Contacts - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Maximal torque:
Coil - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Max. torque:
Operating
Coil control voltage:
230 V
20 A
X
4 kW, 1 phase
X
1,3 kW only NO, 1 phase
X
4 kW, 1 phase
X
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4 A
6 A
20 A
6 A
0.6 A
600 switch/hr.
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
0.1x10
6
by 30 μF
0.1 10
6 by 1.5 kW
0.2x10
6
0.3x10
6
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm 2 )
6 mm 2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm 2
0.6 Nm
440 V
25 A
16 kW, 3 phase
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW, 3 phase
2.2 kW, 3 phase
16 kW, 3 phase
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW, 3 phase
2.2 kW, 3 phase
4 A
6 A
25 A
6 A
0.6 A
600 switch/hr.
0.2x10
6
0.5x10
6
0.1x10
6
by 36 μF
0.1x10
6
by1.5 kW
0.2x10
6
0.5x10
6
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
25 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm 2 )
6 mm 2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm 2
0.6 Nm
Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:
Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:
Mounting side-by-side:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Standards:
AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,
48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V
2.8 VA/1.2 W
12 VA /10 W max. 2 contactors*
140 g (4.9 oz.)
17,5x85x60 mm
(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,
48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V
5.5 VA/1.6 W
33 VA/25 W max. 2 contactors*
260 g (9.17 oz.)
35x85x60 mm
(1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660
*Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every
other contactor. We off er installation spacer of type IKV.
Connection VSM220
VSM220-20
1
2
2 14
3
4
VSM220-02
R1 R3
R2 R4
Connection VSM425
VSM425-40
1 13 3 23
VS425-31
1 13 3 23
2 14
4 24
4 24
VSM425-22
A1
A2
A1
A2
5 33
6 34
5 33 R7 41
6 34 R8 42
1 13 R3 21 R5 31
2 14 R4 22 R6 32
7 43
8 44
7 43
8 44
VSM425-04
R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41
R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42
VSM220 - only AC supply voltage
VSM220-11
A1
A2
VSM425 - only AC supply voltage
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
1 R3
2 R4
Auxiliary contacts VSK-11 and VSK-20
Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20 see page 108
106
Loadability of installation contactors
TYPE OF LIGHT
Incandescent lamps
Flourescent lamps
Flourescent lamps lead-lag circuit
Flourescent lamps parallel correction
Flourescent lamps with electronic ballast units (EVG)
High-pressure mercury-vapour lamps uncorrected
High-pressure mercuryvapour lamps parallel correction
Halogen metal vapour lamps uncorrected
Halogen metal-vapour lamps parallel correction
High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected
High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel correction
Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected
Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel correction
OPERATION (W)
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
80
125
250
400
700
1000
80
125
250
400
700
1000
50
1 x 18
1 x 36
1 x 58
2 x 18
2 x 36
2 x 58
50
24
36
58
36
58
18
1000
18
24
36
58
18
24
60
100
200
500
400
1000
18
35
55
90
135
150
250
400
1000
150
250
180
18
35
55
90
135
180
0.25
0.45
0.75
1.5
2.5
5.8
11.5
0.53
1
1.8
3
3.5
9.5
16.5
0.41
0.65
1.22
1.95
3.45
4.8
0.8
1.15
2.15
3.25
5.4
7.5
0.28
0.09
0.16
0.25
0.17
0.32
0.49
0.61
0.22
0.35
0.12
0.15
0.2
0.32
4.35
0.37
0.35
0.43
0.67
0.11
0.14
0.26
0.43
0.87
2.17
2.4
6.3
0.35
1.5
1.5
2.4
3.5
1.8
3
4.7
10.3
0.83
1.5
3.3
0.35
0.31
0.42
0.63
0.94
1.16
I (A)
VS120
-
-
-
-
5
2
1
-
3
1
5
3
18
10
-
-
1
4
3
1
1
4
2
1
10
7
4
7
7
14
25
15
14
12
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
33
20
10
3
7
4
3
22
7
-
-
-
-
1
5
3
2
-
-
1
1
3
6
1
VS220
-
5
3
-
-
-
1
-
5
2
3
3
1
-
18
10
5
-
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
4
2
14
10
7
12
7
7
4
25
15
14
7
7
7
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
3
1
22
33
20
10
3
3
6
7
7
4
-
22
-
-
-
2
1
-
-
1
1
1
VS420
-
-
-
-
5
2
1
3
1
-
5
3
18
10
-
1
-
4
3
1
1
4
2
1
10
7
4
7
7
14
25
15
14
12
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
33
20
10
3
7
4
3
22
7
-
-
1
-
-
5
3
2
-
-
1
1
3
6
1
VSM220 VSM425
-
-
-
-
5
2
1
-
3
1
5
3
18
10
-
-
1
4
3
1
1
4
2
1
10
7
4
7
7
14
25
15
14
12
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
33
20
10
3
7
4
3
22
7
-
-
-
-
1
5
3
2
-
-
1
1
3
6
1
-
-
1
1
6
3
1
3
1
-
7
4
22
12
-
1
-
5
4
2
1
5
3
2
13
9
5
10
9
18
35
20
19
17
2 x 24
2 x 14
8
8
8
5
1
24
24
20
17
2 x 40
2 x 31
33
20
10
3
9
5
4
27
9
-
-
1
1
1
6
4
2
-
-
1
1
4
7
1
Number of lights on one contactor’s contact
VS425 VS440 VS463
-
-
1
1
6
3
1
3
1
-
7
4
22
12
-
1
-
5
4
2
1
5
3
2
13
9
5
10
9
18
35
20
19
17
2 x 24
2 x 14
8
8
8
5
1
24
24
20
17
2 x 40
2 x 31
33
20
10
3
9
5
4
27
9
-
-
1
1
1
6
4
2
-
-
1
1
4
7
1
2
1
6
6
36
18
11
6
2
1
43
23
12
7
9
5
4
27
22
12
3
31
7
4
29
20
10
100
52
50
50
26
25
38
2 x 65
2 x 40
48
48
48
31
65
40
20
8
4
90
90
65
45
2 x 100
2 x 78
23
14
10
71
23
4
2
3
11
6
17
10
6
4
5
11
8
10
44
11
3
2
9
8
50
25
15
9
3
1
60
32
18
10
13
7
5
41
33
18
10
6
4
47
42
29
15
38
36
55
140
75
72
70
2 x 95
2 x 60
73
73
73
47
85
50
25
10
5
140
140
95
70
2 x 150
2 x 118
30
19
13
90
30
6
3
3
16
10
22
13
8
7
8
16
12
13
66
16
107
EAN codes
EAN codes for VS
VS120
VS120-01 24V AC/DC
VS120-01 230V AC/DC
VS120-10 24V AC/DC
VS120-10 230V AC/DC
8595188129848
8595188123105
8595188129367
8595188123112
VS440
VVS440-04 24V AC/DC
VS440-04 110V AC/DC
VS440-22 24V AC/DC
VS440-22 230V AC/DC
VS440-31 24V AC/DC
VS440-31 230V AC/DC
VS440-40 24V AC/DC
VS440-40 110V AC/DC
VS440-40 230V AC/DC
8595188129299
8595188129305
8595188129787
8595188121477
8595188129572
8595188121460
8595188129565
8595188138567
8595188121453
EAN codes for VSM
VS220
VS220-02 24V AC/DC
VS220-02 110V AC/DC
VS220-02 230V AC/DC
VS220-11 24V AC/DC
VS220-11 48V AC/DC
VS220-11 110V AC/DC
VS220-11 230V AC/DC
VS220-20 24V AC/DC
VS220-20 48V AC/DC
VS220-20 110V AC/DC
VS220-20 230V AC/DC
VS463
VS463-22 24V AC/DC
VS463-22 230V AC/DC
VS463-31 24V AC/DC
VS463-31 110V AC/DC
VS463-31 230V AC/DC
VS463-40 24V AC/DC
VS463-40 110V AC/DC
VS463-40 230V AC/DC
8595188129381
8595188138628
8595188121422
8595188129374
8595188129398
8595188130790
8595188121408
8595188125253
8595188129411
8595188129428
8595188121392
8595188129794
8595188121514
8595188129596
8595188137904
8595188121507
8595188129589
8595188140652
8595188121491
VSM220
VSM220-02 24V AC
VSM220-02 230V AC
VSM220-11 24V AC
VSM220-11 230V AC
VSM220-20 12V AC
VSM220-20 24V AC
VSM220-20 230V AC
8595188129817
8595188128100
8595188129800
8595188128094
8595188138369
8595188128117
8595188128087
VSM425
VSM425-04 24V AC
VSM425-04 230V AC
VSM425-22 24V AC
VSM425-22 230V AC
VSM425-31 24V AC
VSM425-31 42V AC
VSM425-31 230V AC
VSM425-40 12V AC
VSM425-40 24V AC
VSM425-40 230V AC
8595188129831
8595188128155
8595188129336
8595188128148
8595188129824
8595188160247
8595188128131
8595188143820
8595188128162
8595188128124
VS420
VS420-31 24V AC
VS420-31 110V AC
VS420-31 230V AC
VS420-40 12V AC
VS420-40 24V AC
VS420-40 48V AC
VS420-40 230V AC
8595188129442
8595188129466
8595188121446
8595188129459
8595188129435
8595188138581
8595188121439
VS425
VS425-04 24V AC/DC
VS425-04 48V AC/DC
VS425-04 110V AC/DC
VS425-04 230V AC/DC
VS425-13 230V AC/DC
VS425-22 24V AC/DC
VS425-22 230V AC/DC
VS425-31 24V AC/DC
VS425-31 48V AC/DC
VS425-31 110V AC/DC
VS425-31 230V AC/DC
VS425-40 24V AC/DC
VS425-40 48V AC/DC
VS425-40 230V AC/DC
VS425-40 400V AC/DC
8595188129527
8595188129558
8595188143820
8595188121682
8595188129473
8595188129541
8595188121675
8595188129497
8595188137898
8595188129534
8595188121668
8595188129480
8595188136174
8595188121651
8595188129503
VSK-11
VSK-20
8595188121613
8595188121606
108
Technical information
Main regulations for correct use of products
Product loadability
110
111-112
Electro-magnectic compatibility of products
EMC chart
Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads
Complementary information
113
114
115
Products packing
Dimensions
Examples of usage
Use of the products in domestic installations
Use of the product in the industry
Support of project designing
Production technology
116
117-121
122-129
131
132
133
134-135
109
Main instructions for correct use of ELKO EP products
To ensure correct and perfect function of a device and its safe operation, it is necessary to ensure and observe several main regulations:
1.) Device supply
- it is necessary to ensure continuous supply of the device without drops and voltage peaks. It is mainly important for device (e.g. dimmers) where there is synchronization managed by sine wave of the main and fault in the main ca cause unreliable function of the device
- it is necessary to observe correct connection of terminals, and in case of DC supply voltage also polarity.
- it is necessary to observe allowed tolerance of the size of supply voltage which is given by technical parameters of individual devices
2.) Protection of the device
- it is necessary to ensure protection of the device by adequate elements of overvoltage protection – by fuses, by surge arrestors
3.) Elimination of disturbances on input circuits
- it is recommended to eliminate disturbances on control inputs of devices by suitable elements (R-C elements) and thus minimize creation of inductive voltage on incoming wires
- pay attention when connecting control inputs and while keep in mind max. current and min. voltage at rest, which can cause spontaneous switching of device (e.g. connected glow lamps)
4.) Opereting conditions
- to assure the granted life and correct functions of device, there is not recommended to leave the device in extreme conditions that could negative way infl uence the correct device functions - permanent temperature infl uence over 70°C, aggressive exhalations, chemicals, high relative humadity over 95%, high electromagnetic fi eld or microwave radiation
- for error-free function it is necessary to avoid device placement close to electromagnetic interference source
- all mentioned products fulfi ll the EMC requirements in accordance to EU Directive 89/336/EEC. Notwithstanding it is necessary to pay attention by device connecting to circuit with electrical appliances that produce electromagnetic interference (contactors, motors), and pay attention to close power cables. It is recommended that device connecting cables
(supply and control inputs) are possibly short and go separately from power cables. In case the device is connected to circuit with contactors or motors it is necessary to protect the device with appropriate extern protection components - RC members, varistors or surge voltage protector.
- when you use AL wires, it is necessary to follow requirements of ČSN standard 370606: 1959 and ČSN 370606 amendment 2: 1992
5.) Device handling and using
- input terminals do not fi ll-in with high power (for serial terminals max 0.5 N/m), do not give excessive pressure to carrier terminal parts to avoid demage of inner device construction
- protect the device before falls and excessive vibrations that could demage relays contacts
- do not overload input relay´s contacts, especially when using loads with other category then AC1
- when at switching of big loads the relay contacts get sealed it is necessary to use inserted contactor or power relay tuned to required load for given application
Description of used protection elements in device
All time and monitoring relays from our assortment are equiped with protective elements (varistors) against possible overvoltage in supply main. Limit voltage of used varistors is 275 V. At short-time overvoltage in supply main varistor decrease its leak resistor and accumulate arosen overvoltage. When this overvoltage behave as short-time peak, varistor is able to react and protect the device against negative infl uences. As other protection elements there are used transils and zener diodes that eliminate overvoltage impulses in supply and input circuits of device (e.g. when switching inductive loads). In case of switching inductive loads it is recommended to separate a supply of power element (motors, contactors etc.) from supply of measuring and control device inputs.
On the charts bellow you can see oscilographic running of disconnecting of loads (contactors) and reaction of protective elements to arosen voltage pikes.
Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on Process of disconnection of contactor with coil and limited
230V/AC without R-C member 230V/AC and R-C member 390 Ohm-330 nF varistor on 230V/AC
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d t=5ms/d
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d t=10ms/d
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d t=5ms/d
110
Product loadability
PRODUCT
SOU-2 RHV-1; SOU-3;
TEV-4
CRM-4; CRM-42; MR-41;
MR-42; SHT-1; SHT-1/2; SHT-3;
SHT-3/2; SHT-4; SMR-B; SOU-1;
RHT-1; TER-3A; TER-3B; TER-3C;
TER-3D; TER-3E; TER-3F; TER-3G;
TER-3H ; VS116K; VS116U;
VS316/24V; VS316/230V
CRM-82TO; CRM-83J;
CRM-93H; PRM-2H;
PRM-92H; TER-7; VS308K;
VS308U; CRM-61; HRH-5;
HRN-54; HRN-54N; HRN-55;
HRN-55N; HRN-56;
HRN-57; HRN-57N;
PRI-32; PRI-51; PRI-52;
PRI-53; HRF-10; TER-9
HRH-6
CONTACT
Material of contact AgSnO
2 contact 8A
Material of contact AgSnO
2 contact 12A
TYPE OF LOAD
Material of contact AgSnO
2 contact 16A
Material of contact AgNi contact 8A
Material of contact AgNi contact 10A
ATC; ATF; ATR; DTC; DTF; DTR;
COS-1; CRM-2H; CRM-2HE;
CRM-2T; CRM-81J; CRM-91H;
CRM-91HE; HRH-1; HRN-33;
HRN-34; HRN-35; HRN-37;
HRN-41; HRN-42; HRN-43;
HRN-43N; HRN-63; HRN-64;
HRN-67; PDR-2; PRI-41; PRI-42;
PRM-91H; SJR-2; TER-4; TEV-1;
TEV-2; TEV-3
Material of contact AgNi contact 16A
AC1
cos φ ≥ 0.95
M
AC2
M
AC3
250V / 8A
250V / 5A
250V /4A
250V / 12A
250V / 3.7A
250V /2.2A
250V / 16A
250V / 5A
250V / 3A
250V / 8A
250V / 3A
250V /2A
250V / 10A
250V / 3A
250V /2A
250V / 16A
250V / 5A
250V / 3A
AC5a uncompensated
X
X
230V / 2.2A (510VA)
230V / 2.2A (510VA) till max output C=14UF
230V / 3A (690VA)
230V / 3A (690VA) till max output C=14UF
230V / 1.5A (345VA)
X
230V / 2A (460VA)
X
230V / 3A (690VA)
X
AC5a compensated
HAL.230V
AC5b
250W 1 120W 1000W 300W 500W 800W
250V /4A X X X X X
AC6a
250V /1A
250V / 2.2A
250V / 3A
250V /1A 250V / 2A 250V / 3A
AC7b
250V /1A
250V / 7.5A
X
250V /1A 250V / 6A 250V / 10A
AC12
X
250V / 4.5A
X
X 250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
AC13
250V /4A 250V / 4.5A
250V / 6A
250V /3A
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
AC14
AC15
K
250V /3A 250V / 4.5A
250V / 6A
250V /3A
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
30V / 8A 24V / 12A 24V / 10A 24V / 8A 24V / 10A 24V / 16A
DC1
M
30V / 3A
24V / 4.5A
24V / 3A
24V / 3A 24V / 3.8A
24V / 6A
DC3
M
30V / 2A
24V / 3A 24V / 2A
24V / 2A 24V / 2.5A
24V / 4A
DC5
30V / 8A
24V / 12A 24V / 6A
24V / 8A 24V / 10A 24V / 16A
DC12
30V / 2A 24V / 1.5A
24V / 2A
24V / 2A 24V / 1.3A
24V / 2A
DC13
X 24V / 1.5A
X
X
24V / 1.3A
24V / 2A
DC14
111
Product loadability
Problematic choice of suitable relay contact for a particular load switched with a product is described below.
Mostly we experience problems with incorrect choice of load (meaning incorrect relay for a particular load) which results in permanent switching of contact (sealing) or damage on relay contact – which then results in malfunction.
What load can you use?
Detailed types of load according to standard EN 60947 are described in charts below – categories of use.
Typical use
EN
Category of use
AC current, cosφ = P/S (-)
AC-1
AC-2
AC-3
Non-inductive or slightly inductive load, resistance furnace
Includes all appliances supplied by AC current with power factor (cos .) 0.95.
Examples of usage: resistance furnace, industrial loads
Motors with slip-ring armature, switching off
Motors with short-circuit armature, motor switching when in operation
This category applies to switching off motors with short-circuit armature while in operation. While switching, contactor switches current which is 5 up to 7 times rated current of motor.
60947-4
60947
60947-4
AC-4
AC-5a
AC-5b
AC-6a
AC-6b
AC-7a
AC-7b
AC-8a
AC-8b
AC-12
AC-13
AC-14
AC-15
AC-20
AC-21
AC-22
AC-23
AC-53a
Electro-motors with short-circuit armature: start up, braking by backset, changeover
Switching of electrical gas-fi lled lights, fl uorescent lights
El. bulb switching
Enables low contact loading due to resistance of cold fi ber is many times smaller that the one of hot fi ber.
Switching of transformers
Switching of capacitors
Switching low inductive loads of home appliances and similar applications
Load of motors for home appliances
Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload
Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid
Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload
Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid
Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers
Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers
Switching of low electro-magnetic loads (max.72 VA)
Management of alternating electro-magnetic loads
This category applies to switching inductive loads with input for closed electro-magnetic circuit higher than 72 VA
Use: switching coils of contactors
Connecting and disconnecting in unloaded states
Switching resistive loads, including low loading
Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including low overloading
Switching of motor loads or other high inductive loads
Switching of motors with short-circuit armature with semiconductor contactors
Note: Category AC 15 replaces formerly used category AC 11
60947
60947-4
60947-4
60947-4
60947-4
60947
60947
60947
60947
60947-5
60947-5-1
60947-5-1
60947-5
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
60947
DC current, t = L/R (s)
DC-1
DC-3
DC-5
DC-6
DC-12
DC-13
DC-14
DC-20a(b)
DC-21a(b)
DC-22a(b)
DC-23
Non-inductive or low inductive load, resistive furnaces
Shunt motors: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking
Series motor:
start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking
Non-inductive or low inductive loads, resistive furnaces – el. bulbs
Management of resistive loads and fi xed loads with insulation by opto-electric element
Switching of electromagnets
Switching of electromagnetic loads in circuits with limiting resistor
Switching and breaking without load(a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)
Switching ohmic loads including limiting overloading (a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)
Switching of compound ohmic and inductive loads including limited overloads ( e.g. shunt motors)
(a: frequent switching, b: random switching)
Switching of highly inductive loads (e.g. series motors)
60947-4
60947-4-1
60947-4-1
60947-4-1
60947-5-1
60947-5-1
60947-5-1
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
How can you distinguish for which load is our product (relay) designated?
Our company record this information on a products and also in our catalogue, instruction manual and other promotional and technical material (website etc.).
It is important to realize that it is not always possible to point out load because of lack of information about the device (user cannot measure cos) or it is not possible because of inconstancy of parameters of switched device.
Manufacturer of relays records always guaranteed parameters in ideal conditions which are done by a norm (temperature, pressure, humidity, etc.) and reality can be in a lot of cases diff erent.
Category of use (classifi cation) of a particular relay is done by material of output contacts.
Basic types of materials which are used for production of contacts for high-performance relay are: a)AgCd – suitable for switching ohmic loads. Before of harmfulness of Cd, this type of contact is remitted. b)AgNi –designated for switching resistive loads , good quality switching and conducting (contact doesn’t oxidate) small currents/voltages ,it is not designated for surge currents and loads with inductive component c)AgSn or AgSnO –suitable for switching loads with inductive component , not suitable for switching small currents/voltages, it is more resistive to surge currents, suitable for DC voltage switching, less suitable for switching loads of ohmic type d)Wf (wolfram)-special contact designated for switching surge currents with inductive component e)with gold (AgNi/Au)- Used for “improving” contacts for low currents/ voltages , prevents oxidation.
112
Electromagnetic compatibility of ELKO EP, s.r.o. products
Electromagnetic compatability (EMC) is a new scientifi c fi eld which was founded in the 60s last century. It had been known only to a small number of specialists working in a military and cosmic research.
Electromagnetic compatability EMC is defi ned as an ability of a device, system or a machine to show the correct operation even in an environment in which there are other sources of electromagnetic signals (natural or artifi cial), and also an ability not to infl uence negatively the environment by its own “electromagnetic action” and not to radiate signals that would disturb other devices. It is an indicator of good quality and reliability. Breach of such EMC requirements may cause several damages with catastrophical consequences.
When testing EMC of a device (technical and biological), basic is represented by so called “ fundamental chain of
EMC” shown in the picture. This chain shows a system problematic of EMC and we inspect all three components.
SOURCE OF
ELECTROMAGNETIC
DISTURBANCES
ENVIRONMENT OF DISTRIBUTION,
ELECTROMAGNETIC STRUCTURE
DISTURBED OBJECT,
DISTURBING RECEIVER motors, switches, relays, power distributions, semi-conducting arc furnances, welding machines, oscillators, PC, digital systems, electrostatic discharge...
air space, energy cables, supply convection, convection, grounding, screening, signaling conductors, data condutors...
digital devices, PC, measuring devices, automatization device, telecommunication system, data transmission system, wireless set, televisor...
Test SURGE
For guarantee the immunity of our devices against to electromagnetic disturbance we are doing EMC tests and according results we are still innovating our product to be accoding the EMC norms with reserve.
The most important test is immunity against gust of high-energy voltage and current impulse (SURGE), what is made according the norm IEC 61000-4-5.
By this our products are controlled in case of short time pulse, what is apllicated as to input as to output circuits of divices, to switching inputs, sensing inputs, etc. Our produts pass all criterias and are fully competitive to foreign products.
Test SURGE is used in practice mainly for 1-phase devices with take-off current to 16 A. It makes use of voltage impulse 1,2/50 ms no load and current impulse 8/20 ms for short time. Size of used voltage impulse is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV, size of used current impulse is 2kA on 4kV with choise of changing polarity. For testing by impulses is as coup mode specify capacitive coupling.
Test BURST
Other very important test is test immunity against quick short-lived eff ect (couple of impulses- BURST), which dissimulated infl uence if industry disturbance. Test is made according to the norm IEC 61000-4-4.
Disturbance signal is injected to supply circuits and communication cabling. Coupling is made by 1-phase capacitive circuit or coupling capacitive ribband to supply, signalling or data convection of tested device. Size of testing impulses is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV in possitive and negative polarity. Repeat frequence is 2.5 kHz, or 5 kHz. Period of testing 0 - 6 minut by steps for 0.1s.
Test POWERFAIL
For right function of products in industry is important POWERFAIL test - simulation of decreasing and failure of supply voltage. It is made according to the IEC 61000-4-11.
Short-time supply decreasing are random decreasing of supply voltage, which are more than 10 - 15 % of its nominal size and have short time existing 0.5 - 50 periodes of basic frequency 50 Hz.
Short breaks of voltage are short time decreasing over 100 %. Mentioned changes of supply circuit voltage are made in practise by disturbance in mains (high voltage, low voltage ) and breaks on load of the main.
Test of EMC EMISSIONS
Electronic devices must be designed not to be a source of oversize electric or electromagnetic disturbances in its surroundings. Test is executed according to standard EN 55022.
Emissions are measured by wires or by air.
Test OF ELECTROMAGNETIC HIGH-FREQUENCY FIELD AND HF SIGNAL COMING FROM THE MAIN
The purpose of this test is to verify immunity of the device against electromagnetic fi elds that are created by radio transmitters or by any other device which transmits electromagnetic energy by uninterrupted waves
(walkie-talkies, radio and TV transmitters.)
Test is carried out against disturbances in the main and emissions. We apply testing level 3 which for HF fi eld means intensity of fi eld 10 V/m and for HF signal it is voltage level 10 V.
Test OF ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
It is a test of resistance against discharges of electrostatic energy caused by servicing or by surrounding objects. Such discharge can damage a device or its components.
Test is carried out by direct or indirect application of discharges to a tested device. Test is carried out according to a standard EN 61000-4-2. Direct infl uence of discharges is targeted into such places and surfaces that are accessible to servicing during common use. Indirect infl uence of discharge is done by horizontal and vertical coupling board.
The device is treated by at least ten individual discharges for positive and negative polarity. Testing levels are 2kV, 4kV, 6kV, 8kV, 15kV.
Company ELKO EP has its own test laboratory in which it carries out pre-certifi cation for conditions that must be met by each of our products. Thus customers gets not only a product of a high quality, which is ensured by many years of experience in the fi eld of switching relays, but also a product which can operate in demanding conditions of industrial environment. Product, tested this way, guarantees reliability and functionality to customer’s full satisfaction.
113
EMC - parameters
STANDARD STANDARD
114
PRODUCT
Time relays
CRM-91H/230V
CRM-91H/UNI
CRM-93H/230V
CRM-93H/UNI
CRM-9S
CRM-61
SHT-1
SHT-1/2
SHT-3
SHT-3/2
PDR-2A/230V
PDR-2A/UNI
PDR-2B/230V
PDR-2B/UNI
PRM-91H/8
PRM-91H/11
CRM-81J/230V
CRM-81J/UNI
CRM-83J/230V
CRM-83J/UNI
CRM-82TO
SJR-2/230V
SJR-2/UNI
CRM-2T/230V
CRM-2T/UNI
CRM-2H/230V
CRM-2H/UNI
CRM-91HE/UNI
CRM-2HE/UNI
PRM-92H
PRM-2H
SMR-T
SMR-H
SMR-B
CRM-4
CRM-42
Power and auxiliary relays
VS116K
VS116U
VS308K/230V
VS308K/UNI
VS308U
VS316/24V
VS316/230V
Dimmers
DIM-2
DIM-5
DIM-14
DIM-6
DIM6-3M-P
DIM-15
SMR-S
SMR-U
DIM-10
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
-
3
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/A
-
55022/B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/B
55014-1
55014-1
55014-1
55022/A
55022/B
55022/B
PRODUCT
Power supplies
PS-10-12; PS-10-24
PS-30-12; PS-30-24
PS-100-12; PS-100-24
PS-30R
ZSR-30
ZNP-10-12V
ZNP-10-24V
Other modular devices
SOU-1/230V
SOU-1/UNI
SOU-2
SOU-3
MR-41/230V
MR-41/UNI
MR-42/230V
MR-42/UNI
Monitoring relays
HRN-41
HRN-42
HRN-33
HRN-34
HRN-35
HRN-37
HRN-63
HRN-64
HRN-67
HRN-55
HRN-55N
HRN-57
HRN-57N
HRN-54
HRN-54N
HRN-56/120
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
HRN-56/400
HRN-56/480
HRN-56/575
HRN-43
HRN-43N
PRI-32
PRI-51/1
PRI-51/2
PRI-51/5
PRI-51/8
PRI-51/16
PRI-51/0.5
PRI-52
PRI-41
PRI-42
HRH-1/230V
HRH-1/24V
HRH-1/110V
HRH-5
3
3
3
3
-
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/A/B
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
61000-6-3
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
-
55022/A
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/A
-
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
-
-
55022/B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
PRODUCT
HRH-4/230V
HRH-4/24V
HRH-6/AC
HRH-6/DC
COS-1
Thermostats
TEV-1
TEV-2
TEV-3
TEV-4
RHT-1
RHV-1
TER-3A
TER-3B
TER-3C
TER-3D
TER-3E
TER-3F
TER-3G
TER-3H
TER-4/230V
TER-4/24V
TER-9/230V
TER-9/24V
TER-7
ATR; ATC; ATF
DTR; DTC; DTF
STANDARD
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
55022/B
55022/B
61000-6-3
-
55022/A
55022/B
-
55022/B
-
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
61000-6-3
55022/B
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads
As is our good tradition, we have always been seeking for a maximum universality of our products. We have successfully developed a dimmer DIM-15 and SMR-M, and because the LED lighting dimming - as well as dimming of energy saving lamps - is a relatively new area and there are not so many manufacturers who produce dimmable energy saving resources, we will gradually test and expand the chart below. We welcome your feedback and cooperation in addressing us your comments and new types.
Type
Typ
Light sources ELKO Lighting
ELKO Lighting DLB-E27-806-2K7
ELKO Lighting LED DLSL-GU10-250-3K
Type Light sources from manufacturers
Brilum LED line 18led
Brilum LED line
Brilum LED line JCR-27D 48Led
Elim SMD-W12
Elim SDW21
Elim SMD-W20
Panlux E27L1-81120/T
LED LAMPJDRE27
Brilum Led line white 21led
Osram dulux el.dimmable lumilux warm white 1230lm
Megaman dimmerable 2700K DEC01
Lumee GU 10-60-CW-120
Lumee GU 10-P-60-CW-120
Lumee JDRE 14-60-CW-120
Lumee Ball-80-CW
Philips Master 20W
Led Osram Decospot 0,75W
Led Philips Master 7W
Philips LEDspot MV 4W GU10 40D
Philips LEDspot MR 16 LV 4W GU5,3 24D
Philips LEDspot MV 3W GU10 25D
Energetic BULB Warm White 250 Lumen
Energetic BULB Clear Warm White 250 Lumen
Energetic Warm White Refl ector GU10 600 CD
Energetic Cool White Refl ector GU10 550 CD
Energetic Warm White Dimmer 1200 Lumen
Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 1300 Lumen
Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 520 Lumen
TR-0WGE-05
Paulmann refl ector electrobnic 7W GU 10
Osram parathom classic A 40
Osram parathom classic B 25
Osram parathom PAR16
EMOS 48led 2W
EMOS dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps 20W
Socket
E27
GU-10
Dimmable
Yes
DIM 15 SMR-M LIC-1
RFDSC-11
RFDSC-71
RFDEL-71B
30 pc 16 pc 30 pc 30 pc 16 pc
Yes 50 pc 26 pc 50 pc 50 pc 26 pc
The maximum number of units can be connected to dimmers
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Dimmable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
GU-5.3
GU-10
E27
E27
GU-10
GU-10
E27
E27
GU-10
E14
E14
E27
GU-10
GU-10
GU-10
E27
E27
GU-10
E27
E14
GU-10
E14
Socket
GU-10D
GU-10P
E27
GU-10
GU-10
GU-10
E27
E27
GU10D
E27
E14
GU-10
E27
115
Products packing
Products Packing
COS-1, HRH-1, HRN-41, HRN-42,
HRN-43, PDR-2, PRI-41, PRI-42,
PS-12, PS-24, PS-R, ZSR-30,
ZNP-10, ZTR-10, HRN-56/480,
575
Packing of 3-MODULE relay - 1 pc
SHT-1, SHT-3, SHT-1/2, SHT-4,
SOU-2, TER-9,
Packing of 2-MODULE relay - 1 pc
PRM-91H/11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H Packing of plug - in relay - 2 pc
SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-S,
SMR-U, SMR-M
Packing of SMR-14 pc
116
SOU-1, SOU-2, CRM-91HE ,
CRM-2HE
Packing of 1-MODULE relay with accessories
VS116K, VS116U, VS308K,
VS316/24, VS316/230, USS, VS
Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 12 pc
CRM-81J, CRM-83J, CRM-82TO,
CRM-61, CRM-9S, CRM-2H,
CRM-2T, CRM-4, CRM-42,
SOU-1, DIM-2, DIM-5, DIM-14,
HRH-5, HRN-33, HRN-34,
HRN-35, HRN-51, HRN-52,
HRN-54, MR-41, MR-42, PRI-31,
SJR-2, TER-3, TER-7, HRN-56,
HRN-63, HRN-64, HRN-67
Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 10 pc
Design
Dimensions
1-MODULE DESIGN
90
67.5
45
2-MODULE DESIGN
90
67.5
45
35
17.6
PRI-32
35.6
3-MODULE DESIGN
90
67.5
45
35
90
67.5
45
6
17.6
13.8
52
35
SOU-3
21
RHV-1, TEV-4
35
62 34
11
117
Dimensions
R13
MINI
SMR-T, SMR-H, SMT-K
R13
MINI
SMR-S, SMR-U
13.3
R21
MINI
SMR-B
ATR, ATF, ATC
49
89
13.3
28.6
56.4
49
12.6
DTR, DTF, DTC
89
49
21
28.6
54.3
PANEL PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
4
48
41
4
HRN-41, HRN-42, HRN-43,HRN-43N,
PRI-41, PRI-42, COS-1, HRH-1, TER-4
48
PANEL ZSR-30, PS-30-R, ZNP-10
48
4.6
PS-100-12, PS-100-24
48
9 10
10
PS-30-12, PS-30-24
48
19
8
11
8.5
8.5
6-MODULE DESIGN
PS-10-12, PS-10-24
17.6
90
45
33.9
14.1
105
118
7
41
8.8
8.8
35
Dimensions
PRM-91H/11. PRM-91H/8 PRM-92H, PRM-2H
37
4
ES-11
Socket for PRM-91H/ 11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H, 750
ES-8
Socket for PRM-91/8
HRH-6
20
14
2,2x0,5
4,4 4,4 4,4
21,2
110
6 x 4
28 28
30
38
4.2
50
750L
782L
35 13 54,4
30
38
4.2
27
27 photosensor SKS
21.8
50
66
M16x1.5
M16x1.5
M16x1.5
23
20.8
external potentiometer
for CRM-2HE, CRM-91HE
27
M 22x1
B1 B3 B2
15
119
Dimensions
43
56
28
77
46
68
SR051; SR101; SR151
box IP66 for TEV1,2
110
46
SR200; SR250
box IP66 for TEV3
110
6
SR300; SR400; SR600
120
M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M16x1.5
27 27
M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M16x1.5
27 27
Dimensions
VS120
VS220
VSM220 17.5
VS425
VSM425
35
VS440
VS463
53.3
VS420
4.4
45
VSK-20
10
44
60
IKV
4.7
35.5
45.1
8.9
ATV-1
53.5
02
Mo Di
61
Mi
:
Do
21
Fr
8
Sa
4
So
AUTO
MANU
MENU OK +
121
Examples of usage
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H,CRM-93H
- for electric appliances, where is necessary to change the exact timing - controlling of the illumination, heating, motors, machines, ventilators, contactors...
N
N
L
L
A1 S A2
A1 S A2
Multifunc tionalit y alw ays and ev erywher e
15 16 18
15 16 18
Multifunction time relay with contactless output CRM-9S
- using for warning illuminatin on the road, fl ashers, cyclers, often switched systems ...
12 V AC
A1 S A2
CR -9S
Multifunction time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE
- time adjusting via external operating unit, operating on panel, switchboard doors
N
L
A1 S A2
B1 B3 B2 external operating unit
B1 18 18
Singlefunction time relay CRM-81J
- time switch, using for run down the pump after switch off the heating, switching of ventilators ...
N
L
A1 S A2
15 16 18
Multifunction time relay CRM-61
- for electronic appliances, light control, heating, motors, fans.....
L
N
A2 A1
S
CRM-61
16
15 18
15 16 18
122
Examples of usage
Time relay plug-in type PRM-91H, PRM-92H
- serves to control light signallization, heating, motor and fan control... etc.
L
N
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
- for sequential load switching, electric furnaces, heaters....
N
L
A1 A2
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
- delayed back-up switch off at current failure (emergency illumination, emergency respirator)
N
L
A1 A2
16 26
CRM-82TO
FUNC e a
18 28
15 25
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
- regular rooms ventilation, cyclic humidity exhaustion, illumination controlling, circulation pump, fl ash, warning appliances, regular pump down, regular irrigation via electromagnetic valve
N
L
A1 S A2
1
2
25 26 28
15 16 18
3
Staircase switch CRM-4
- staircase automatic systems, ventilators switching, for multiplace operating illumina-
N tion on the staircases and halls...
L
A1 S A2
15 16 18
Progammable staircase automat with signalling before switch off CRM-42
- starcaise illumination operation
- on-coming switch off signalling (fl ash = comfort + safety together)
L
A2 S
15 16 18
N
A1 18
123
Examples of usage
N
L
Digital time switch SHT-1/2
- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, appliances could be controlled in regular cycles, or according to adjusted program (blocking of main door out of working hours or night)
- in combination with other devices could be controlling combinated (rooms ventilation, irrigation controlling, bell at school or in church...)
ting in y our rida y o swit ch hea e... e
.g. on F
When y
.m.
A1 16 15 18
7
Auto
13th a
12
0 6
SHT-1/2
PRG
+ MAN
MAN 2
ESC
RESET
OK
A2 26 25
N
L
Programmable digital relay PDR-2
- illumination, ventilators, contactors controlling, controlling of interlocking plans, system of time abate and blocking (billiards, pin-balls....), away control via external buttons
cura te informa tion about time
.... y....
ou need maximum and ac
When y ou need a displa then y
26 25 28 18 15 16
N
230V
L
Twilight switch SOU-1
- outdoor illumination switching (garden illumination), fl ash, shop-window, hall and offi ce illumination (switch off in desired light level, controlling of intensity)
N
L
VS425
IN IN
IN IN
VS425
15 16 18
124
15 16 18
Examples of usage
Delay on star/delta CRM-2T
- motor starting more than 3 kW, electronic switchover from mode start to mode operation with device CRM-2T, what assures exact timing
N
L
A1 A2
VS425
Mini contactor VS425
- switching of the higher loads, especially in other categories than AC1
ork, c ontac tor
VS425
y rela y can no longer w ou
When auxiliar
VS425 will help y
25 26 28
15 16 18
Modular contactor VS120. VS220. VS420. VS425
- to switch circuits for supply and control of heating, lights, air-conditioning and other el. devices.
Switches loads AC-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, AC-15
L
N
Modular contactors VS440. VS463
- to switch supply and control circuits for heating, air-conditioning and other el. devices, switching 3-phase motors
Switches loads A-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, and AC-15
L
N
VS220-20
A1-A2 AC 230V
50/60Hz
A1-A2 DC 220V
( ) A1 1 3
( ) A2 2 4
AC1
4kW / 1 230V
AC3 1.3kW / 1 230V
VS440-40
I th
= 40A
A1-A2 AC 220-230V
50/60Hz
( )
A1-A2 DC 220-230V
A1
( ) A2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AC1 40A / 3
26kW / 3
AC3 11kW / 3
400V
400V
400V
Auxiliary plug-in relays 750. 782
- to switch bigger output (load) replacement of current plug-in relays when servicing...
Digital time switch SHT-1, SHT-1/2
- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, in daily or weekly mode
N
L
A1 16 15 18
Auto
7
0 6 12
SHT-1/2
reset
MAN 2
PRG
+ MAN ESC
OK
A2 26 25 28
125
Examples of usage
Staircase automat with dimming DIM-2
- step by step (fl uent) dim up, adjusted time is ON and fl uent dim down (e.g. possible to adjust permanent shine to min. brightness everlasting light)
- block of fl ats (entry, halls, staircases), garden lighting
N
L
A1 V
T2
. bulb can giv than y ou think e you mor e
N
L
Controlled dimmer DIM-5
- short press ON/OFF, long press - brightness regulation, is in memory.
Other presses activate memory
- switch on and dimming of hall, staircase ...
A1 V
-
ve el
.ener
ces gy
Feel c omfor together with y our ligh t sour
A2 T
A2 T1
Power relays VS
- switching of higher load than is capacity of switched unit = repeater
- assistant light controlling, signalling, boilers, ...
N
L
Memory relay MR-41, MR-42
- because of 2-wire parallel buttons connection save money, place and time during the installation
- light switching, hall, staircase, big rooms, controlling systems, automation
A1 ON/OFF A2
B1 B2
MR-42
Un 1
2
L
N
A1 A3 A2
LED
21 22 24
11 12 14
11 12 14
N
L
Switching power supply PS-R
- power supply of any devices and appliances via safe voltage with full galvanically separated from mains
- power supply of driving systems, interlocking plants and use in measurement and control
21 22 24
A1 A3 A2
LED
11 12 14
31 32 34
Controlling and signalling units USS
- compact dimensions, elegant design, wide range of use, confi guration for request
- switching and signalling in switchboard, controlling centre, automation...
ches
, alt erna-
A3 A1
A2
ash:
Wide r ts tha t shine and fl ches and tha t all in double design in
Singal ligh
-
A12
A11 A13
126
Examples of usage
øíkladpoit
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)
- monitoring of mains voltage for appliances inclinable to supply tolerance
AC 230 V
A1 A2
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)
- protection of appliances against under-/overvoltage
A1 A2
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-35
- start of back-up supply in case of failure
N
AC230V
L
A1 A2
15 16 18
25 26 28
oring unit pa ys off
. t int ould be far higher
Investmen
Damage c
15 16 18
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-34
- load disconnected when voltage declines or battery is discharged
N
L
+
A1 A2
4
DC
AC
25 26 28
15 16 18
15 16 18
Monitoring current relay PRI-51, PRI-32
- current-limiting relay (on one branch two appliances, which never work together), controlling systems, motors, heating, current indication, controlling of 1-phase motor run down, during the installation of main housing switchboard could be controlled via eye, if the cooker is not switched
- in connection with current transformers, it is possible to extend current ranges up to 600A, which makes more things possible
N
AC230V
L
A1 A2
B1 B2
16
15 18
127
Examples of usage
L3
L2
L1
N
Relay monitoring power factor COS-1
- monitors power-factor in 3-phase mains / unloading of motors, pumps, lift systems
t tha t pa ys off
. Cost of a mot or can be far higher
L3
L2
L1
N
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-43
- regulation of voltage from generator, water el. plants, 3-phase control in the main
- monitors and protects main´s quality
te co ntro l
3-phase supply under ultima
Relay monitoring sequence and failure of phases HRN-55, HRN-55N
- monitoring of proper motor rotation, electric drive, etc.
L3
L2
L1
N
L1 N
L2 L3
Has y our mot or ev er burn t out? And ur r elay will w wh y? O ou.
you didn´t kno tell y
16
15 18
L3
L2
L1
Monitoring voltage relay for under/vervoltage for 3-phase mains HRN-54
- confortable monitoring of 3-phase mains
L1
L2 L3
Relay monitoring over-/undervoltage in 3-phase mains HRN-54N
- monitoring voltage in switchboard, protection of appliances
L3
L2
L1
N
L1 N
L2 L3
ompac t solution for monitoring mains e“ devic
. Prev ent pr oblems
16
15 18
N
L
Monitoring current relay PRI-41 (PRI-42)
- monitoring over-/-underload (machine, motor ...)
- monitoring consumption, diagnostics of distant appliance (short circuit, increased consump. ...)
AC230 V
16
15 18
One
-phase curr ent under magnifying glass
128
Examples of usage
Level switch HRH-1
- monitoring level in wells, tanks, pools, etc.
N
L
HRH-1
Level switch HRH-5
- monitoring level in well, sump, tanks, pool, silo...
N
L
Thermostat TER-3 with external sensor
- control of temperature of fl oor heating
N
L
A1 A2
T1 T1
ve y ou er o verfl
Has y our r eser voir ev t en ything while ha ving y ever burn to oper probaly ha es, y ou ch.
Regula tion = sa vings and c omfor t
N
L
2 stage thermostat TER-4 with 2 external sensors
- control of temperature of e.g. gas/electric boiler
Sav e money and ha two devic es in one ve
sensor 1
15 18
N
Thermostat for thermal protection of motors TER-7
- protection of motors against thermal overload
L
A1 A2
25 26 28
Befor e it is t oo la te. Simple and basic mot cont rol or
N
L
15 16 18
Ta R Tb built-in
PTC sensor
VS425
Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
- complex control of heating and water heating in a house sensor 1
A1 T1 T1 16 15 18
Auto
T1
7
0 C
0
6 12
A2 T2 T2 26 25 28
t which will e and for the
Do y ou kno off ers y ou 6 func pric e of single
-func tion one?
sensor 2 sensor 2
129
130
Note
Enjoy the complete household equipment by ELKO EP
VS M 22 0
Contactor with optional manual switching (e.g. at boiler)
SM R U
Dimming of spot lights
DI M 15
Dimming of energy saving lights and LED lamps
SO U 3
Function of light switch for pulling down the shutters at a high luminous intensity
TE V 1
Two-level thermostat with independent setting of upper and lower temperature
TE R 9
Water temperature control according to 2 temperatures
SM R B
Ventilation of the room after turning off the button
US S
Versatile and signalling modules
“Do it yourself”
CR M 91 H
Multifunctional relay featuring
10 most frequently used functions
MR 4 2
Control of lighting from multiple locations, stepping relay.
ZT R 15 1 2
For powering the door bells, videophones, door locks
PS 3 012
Power source intrusion, fi re, and
TE R 3A
Thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation
(for thawing the black ice)
TE V 4
PR I I I32
Central monitoring of the current
“is there a lamp switched on without any reason?”
SM R T
Delayed switch-off of room lighting, exhausting the bathrooms
SM R M
Dimming of LED bulbs and dimmable saving light bulbs
HR N 33
Monitoring the voltage at the devices “susceptible” to power supply tolerance
SH T 1
Real-time-based switching of electrical equipment and appliances
LI C 1
Automatically regulates the intensity of light in a room
DI M 2
Staircase automatic switch with adjustable smooth run-up and run-down of light
CR M 4
Staircase switch to control the entrance lights
CR M 2H
Ensures circulation of water at regular intervals ,
1x per 1 hour for 5 minutes
PS B 0 1 2
Ideal for supplying drives, motors, light sources
CO S 1
Monitoring the motor overloading and balancing
HR H 4
The level system consists of HRH-5 and contactors VS425
Temperature monitoring in outdoor and heavy-duty locations (IP 65)
SO U 2
Automatic switching-on of the outdoor lighting at twilight with integrated timer for blocking the functions
HR H 5
Level switch - pumping water from the tank
Industrial use of ELKO EP products
HRF-10
Monitors the value of the alternating voltage frequency
PRI-41/42
Monitoring the maximum permissible weight
TER-3
Monitoring temperature
in a tank
CRM.91H
Dosing material at preset intervals
MR-42
Group control of lighting from multiple locations
SOU-2
Automatic switching-on of the outdoor lighting at twilight
CRM-81J
Periodic ventilation
PRI-53
Intended to monitor the current in 3 phases
HRN-55
Phase failure monitoring
PRI-51
Checking for conveyor jamming
= current increase
VS425
3-phase contactor for triggering the motor
CRM-2T
Starting the motor, wye-delta
HRN-41
Monitoring the voltage level
CRM-91H
Pulse shift
SOU-1
Automatic switching-on of the outdoor lighting at twilight
CRM-2H
Lubricant dispensing
TER-9
Liquid temperature control of two independent circuits
COS-1
Power factor monitoring
= overall protection of motors
PRI-51
Indication of machine
failure / operation, depending on the fl owing current
HRN-37
Voltage / low voltage monitoring
PS-R
Power supply at stabilised voltage
HRN-54
Checking for overvoltage at sensitive machinery circuits
HRN-43
Assuring of continuous energy supply.
Back-up supply switching
HRH-5
Observing the liquid level
SHT-1/2
Pre-heating the devices at preset times
SHT-4
Used for controlling the lighting with no light sensors required
HRN-64
Observing the standby power unit battery
USS-modul
Lucid switching and signalling, modular design, wide range of combinations
Support of project design
Our aim is to give a complete care to all electro project designers.
Our activities:
Our products are a part of the following programs:
Project programs
elektrotechnika
Award programs
V ero
X
Obis
DTB ELKO EP XLS
XLS
MARKS AND SYMBOLS DWG
TRAINING
In case our products attracted your interest, do not hesitate to contact us at [email protected] or see our websites www.elkoep.com for more information.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
In case of any questions regarding use of our products for a particular project, contact us at [email protected]
Note.: logos, names, software, hardware are protected by owner’s rights.
133
Production technology
The base of the production is a modern line disposing of SMD technology. SMD components compose of more than 80 % of all components. In the year 2004 the production line was modernized distinctly and it was completed by some new machines. Herewith the accurancy improved considerably and the capacity enhanced.
1)
Printed circuit boards are placed into a cartridge and then automatically delivered to SMD production line.
2)
Fully automatic adhesive and fl ux printer distributes adhesive or fl ux through profi le form to the place where the SMD components are then mounted. Part of this process is also 3D optic inspection of the executed operation.
3)
SMD components are mounted by pick-up machines.
Three heads with laser alignment can place up to
15,000 components an hour. This machine replaces approximately 100 workers.
4)
PCBs with mounted SMD components are inspected and forwarded to refl ow.
134
5)
Hot-air furnace ERSA serves for glue hardening or to activation of soldering fl ux by re-melting. The furnace has 3 zones. temperature after curing on
3rd ) output) zone approx. 1400C. For fl ux re-melting , the starting temperature is 130 0 C, middle 180 0 C and output is 280 0 C.
6)
Fully automatic line is ended by a cartridge which distributes picked and cured PCBs into holders.
Production technology
7)
After the classic components are manually mounted by experienced workers.
8)
Manual placing of classical components is followed by soldering in soldering unit SEHO 8135-PCS which already supports “lead free” soldering technology. Thanks to IR pre-heating, this soldering unit allows operations on PCB together with temperature sensitive components on the upper side of PCB. Soldering unit is equipped by LW soldering jet and Delta jet. These jets allow a good quality.
9) 10)
After necessary semi-product testing on pin-testers (Pic.9) fi nal assembling into enclosures is executed. The actual state of completion is monitored by bar codes during the whole production process (Pic.10).
11)
Semi-fi nished PCBs are tested by this tester. It replaces visual control.
By using weight board, particular pins on bottom part are in contact.
Functionality of SMD components and classical components is checked.
Testing one PCB set takes about 20 s.
12)
In the end the products are fully printed by laser technology. Laser can burn from upper part) side of the product) and side part (front panel and terminals) printing one piece takes about 30 s.
135
KO E P
EL KO E P R ss ia
O E P la
KO E P kra e
EL KO EP Ge rm an y
EL KO E P ovak ia
EL KO P Hu y iN EL S As ia ( n a)
ELKO EP, s.r.o.
Palackeho 493 / 769 01 Holesov, Vsetuly / Czech Republic tel.: +420 573 514 221 | fax: +420 573 514 227 | [email protected] | www.elkoep.com
Published: 09/2013 / Modifications or amendments reserved/ © Copyright ELKO EP, s.r.o. / 1st edition
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement